*** empty log message ***
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
404fa7d6
DL
1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000
2Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
6For older news, see the file ONEWS.
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
1fa28578
GM
11** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
12the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
13
14** There are new configure options associated with the support for
15images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option to list them.
16\f
17* Changes in Emacs 21.1
18
5cb6a58e
SM
19** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
20on the context.
21
a1b8d58b
GM
22** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
23
6e417ca5
DL
24** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
25been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
26
5898e075
DL
27** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
28`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
29indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
30indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
31
abfcc168
GM
32** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
33sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 34(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
35You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
36
cc181e95
GM
37** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
38on the display using several methods
39
40- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
41a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
42be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
43
44- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
45equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
46
da4496b6 47- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
48
49- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
50the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
51
0daee095 52** The new command `clone-buffer-indirectly' can be used to create
1c459486
GM
53an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
54command `clone-buffer-indirectly-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
55does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 56
176256a1 57** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
58`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
59typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 60
dd0add8e
DL
61** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
62characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
63
699238d9
GM
64** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
65compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
66this behavior.
67
68The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
69compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
70Emacs dump core.
71
72** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 73
7233c5bd
GM
74*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
75whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
76is useful for debugging X problems.
77
78Example:
79
699238d9 80 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 81
100b3cbb
GM
82*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
83visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
84the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
85and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
86visual class names are
87
88 TrueColor
89 PseudoColor
90 DirectColor
91 StaticColor
92 GrayScale
93 StaticGray
94
95Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
96`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
97meaning.
98
99The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
100supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
101`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
102visual.
103
104Example:
105
699238d9 106 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
107
108*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
109specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
110default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
111resource values are `true' or `on'.
112
113Example:
114
699238d9 115 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 116
0d0c76b8
EZ
117** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
118more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
119now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
120
42088c12 121** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 122display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
123shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
124be customized.
c60ea02e 125
31047e0d
DL
126** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
127
b02786f9
GM
128** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
129all frames except the selected one.
130
3261c1d8
DL
131** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
132to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
133
ffe36136
GM
134** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
135the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X either in the echo
136area or with tooltips.
137
559cee90
DL
138** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
139read mail from the menu etc.
140
271b4185
GM
141** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
142a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
143
0daee095
GM
144** Changes in Texinfo mode.
145
146** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
147macros
148
149 Key binding Macro
150 -------------------------
151 C-c C-c C-s @strong
152 C-c C-c C-e @emph
153 C-c C-c u @url
154 C-c C-c q @quotation
155 C-c C-c m @email
156
559cee90
DL
157** Changes in Outline mode.
158
159There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
160`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
161the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
162
404fa7d6
DL
163** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
164groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
165
8964fec7
SM
166** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer
167or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and
168several other special buffers.
169
39783d73
WP
170** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
171under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
172.emacs file.
173
174The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
175determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
176
d35fce81
GM
177** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
178abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
179`directory-abbrev-alist'.
180
df5a1902
GM
181** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
182is running in batch mode. For example,
183
184 (message "%s" (read t))
185
186will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
187to standard output.
188
a933dad1
DL
189** Faces and frame parameters.
190
191There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
192Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
193`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
194`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
195sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
196for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
197parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
198
199Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
200`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 201`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
202`default' face and vice versa.
203
f77a4a8a
GM
204** New face `menu'.
205
206The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
207Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
208attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
209
a933dad1
DL
210** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
211
212The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
213colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
214correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
215the screen gamma of a frame's display.
216
217PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
218in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
219color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
220
221The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
222`ScreenGamma'.
223
224** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
225
226The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
227Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
228oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
229of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
230the text.
231
232** Emacs has a new face implementation.
233
234The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
235font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
236height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
237These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
238specify a font.
239
240Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
241These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
242under Lisp changes, below.
243
244** New default font is Courier 12pt.
245
246** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of
247its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise,
248it is hollow.
249
250** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
251truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
252foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
253customizing face `fringe'.
254
255** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
256can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
257
258** LessTif support.
259
260Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will
261need a version 0.88.1 or later.
262
263** Toolkit scroll bars.
264
265Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
266LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
267configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
268bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
269bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
270Emacs.
271
272When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
273Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
274Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
275Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
276define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
277`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
278
279Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
280a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
281directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
282different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
283system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
284add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
285
286The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
287`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
288This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
289image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
290Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
291
292** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
293
294When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
295widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
296Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
297
298** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
299
300When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
301whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
302defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
303highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
304displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
305whitespace.
306
307** Busy-cursor.
308
309Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
310display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
311
312** Blinking cursor
313
314M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
315terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
316and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
317the group `cursor'.
318
319** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
320
321This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
322generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
323See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
324details.
325
326Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
327have to do anything to activate it.
328
329** Tabs and variable-width text.
330
331Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
332defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
333independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
334Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
335
336** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
337
338*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
339
340 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
341
79dd1637
RS
342The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
343LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 344
79dd1637
RS
345*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
346LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1
DL
347
348** Hscrolling in C code.
349
cc181e95
GM
350Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
351`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
352customized.
a933dad1
DL
353
354** Tool bar support.
355
356Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
357how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
358
359** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
360
361Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
362mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
363line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
364about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
365in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
366
367Currently, the following actions have been defined:
368
369- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
370buffers.
371
372- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
373M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
374
375- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
376
559cee90 377- Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*')
a933dad1
DL
378toggles the read-only status.
379
380- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
381
382** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
383
384When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 385from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
386non-nil.
387
388** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
389
390Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
391Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
392the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
393italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
394Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
395attributes like overlines, strike-throught, box are ignored.
396
397** Sound support
398
399Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
400(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
401Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
402(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
403to enable sound support.
404
405** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
406the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
407forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
408value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
409users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
410even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
411
412The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
413
414** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
415
416As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
417drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
418`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
419
420** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
421bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
422
423This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
424`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
425variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
426
427** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
428
429When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
430value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
431number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
432fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
433
434When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
435value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
436number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
437fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
438
439** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
440notably at the end of lines.
441
442All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
443spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
444
eee54b0e
DL
445There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
446
a933dad1
DL
447** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
448query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
449after each match to get the replacement text.
450
f0124b4a 451** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `E' that lets you
4ff40dd0
GM
452edit the replacement string.
453
454** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', let's
455you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
456lisp-complete-symbol.
457
a933dad1
DL
458** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
459
460If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are
461longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is
462on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size
463by setting the following variable:
464
465- User option: max-mini-window-height
466
467Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
468fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
469specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
470
471Default is 0.25.
472
0d43b60d
GM
473** Changes to hideshow.el
474
475Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
476selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
477
478*** Generalized block selection and traversal
479
480A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
481(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
482which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
483`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
484point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
485(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
486
487If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
488i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
489backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
490the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
491
492*** Isearch support for updating mode line
493
494During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
495blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
496line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
497portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
498is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
499
500To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
501something like this in your .emacs.
502
503 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
504 (lambda ()
505 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
506
559cee90
DL
507** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
508
509If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
510entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
511log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
512
513New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
514buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary.
eb2aac9d
GM
515
516Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
517if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
518
519The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular
520expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be
521cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of
522a file.
523
3476b54a
GM
524** Changes in Font Lock
525
526*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
527font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
528mode.
529
b3b98592
GM
530** Comint (subshell) changes
531
532Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
533and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
534
535The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
536buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
537buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
538
539The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
540M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
541the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
542
e26cec67
GM
543** Changes to Rmail mode
544
c0510d27
GM
545*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
546set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
547receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
548recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
549`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
550as correspondent.
551
552Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
553mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 554regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 555
3b55acc9
GM
556*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
557to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
558Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
559with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
560for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
561
6a1950ec
GM
562*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
563like `j'.
564
5bb6f079
RS
565*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
566specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 567digest message.
e26cec67 568
993d8b7d
DL
569*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
570in which folder to put messages automatically.
571
400a1ed0
GM
572** Changes to TeX mode
573
574The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
575`latex-mode'.
576
a933dad1
DL
577** Changes to RefTeX mode
578
579*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
580 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
581 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
582 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
583 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
584 can be edited from that buffer.
585
586*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
587 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
588 `A' to use all marked entries).
589
590*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
591 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
592
593*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
594 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
595 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
596 been cited.
597
38de9631
GM
598** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
599The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
600semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
601in column 1 are always made leaves.
602
a933dad1
DL
603** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
604has the following new features:
605
606*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
607may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
608to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
609time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
610
611*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
612feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
613file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
614compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
615pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
616defaults to 1.
617
618** Tooltips.
619
620Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
621mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
622can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
623
624Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
625variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
626the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
627tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
628
629** Customize changes
630
631*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
632`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
633cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
634
635*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
636Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
637default).
638
0ae51efb
GM
639*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
640between custom options. Example:
641
642 (defcustom default-input-method nil
643 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
644 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
645 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
646 :group 'mule
647 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
648 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
649
650This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
651current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
652first in a custom-set-variables statement.
653
a933dad1
DL
654** New features in evaluation commands
655
656The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
657modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
658print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
659customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
660eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
661
a933dad1
DL
662** Dired changes
663
664*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
665command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
666is, delete only empty directories.
667
668*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
669command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
670copy directories recursively.
671
f6737cde
GM
672*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
673in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
674the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
675
a933dad1
DL
676** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
677use the -f option when sending mail.
678
b1c609b1
GM
679** CC mode changes.
680
681Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
682current user setups (although it's believed that these
683incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
684However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
685back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
686compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
687release.
688
689*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
690When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
691variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
692take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
693is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
694settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
695possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
696Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
697
698By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
699special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
700the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
701of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
702above.
703
704Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
705when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
706function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
707call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
708then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
709values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
710only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
711function documentation for more info.
712
713The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
714especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
715with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
716intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
717such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
718is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
719configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
720global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
721
722(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
723
724**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
725This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
726
727This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
728variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
729completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
730the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
731empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
732style system.
733
734**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
735In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
736c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
737as far as possible.
738
739*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
740CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
741surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
742chapter about this in the manual.
743
744**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
745The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
746recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
747primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
748adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
749
750**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
751This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
752c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
753
754**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
755This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
756
757It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
758Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
759A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
760inside CC Mode.
761
762Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
763causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
764the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
765available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
766cc-mode/).
767
768**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
769The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
770specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
771literals.
772
773**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
774It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
775prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
776you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
777this function.
778
779*** Fixes to IDL mode.
780It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
781to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
782struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
783Thanks to Eric Eide.
784
785*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
786It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
787opening braces hangs and when they don't.
788
789**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
790
791*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
792See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
793better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
794and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
795
796*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
797previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
798the column specified by comment-column.
799
800*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
801In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
802is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
803prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
804contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
805don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
806
807*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
808instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
809arguments.
810
811*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
812
813*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
814c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
815c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
816variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
817Provan).
818
819*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
820
c407c570
GM
821** Makefile mode changes
822
823*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
824
825*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
826Fontlock mode is active.
827
87be76f6
GM
828** Isearch changes
829
c407c570
GM
830** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
831respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
832that started the search.
833
87be76f6 834*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
835selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
836
87be76f6
GM
837*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
838
d35fce81 839Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
840`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
841search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
842before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
843highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
844`secondary-selection'.
845
846The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
847will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
848Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
849using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
850usual snappy response.
851
852If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
853matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
854set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
855isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
856
35384f06
GM
857** Changes in sort.el
858
859The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 860as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
35384f06
GM
861new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default
862numeric base.
87be76f6 863
d7b511c4
GM
864** Changes to Ange-ftp
865
866*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
867names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
868sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
869
d7b511c4
GM
870*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
871ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
872
4b9347b3
GM
873** Shell script mode changes.
874
875Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
876derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
877sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
878
79214ddf
FP
879** Etags changes.
880
881*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
882
aca0be23 883*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
884possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
885{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
886This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
887a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 888
79214ddf
FP
889*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
890declarations when given the --declarations option.
891
892*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 893"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
894
895*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
896types.
897
de370c4c 898*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
899
900*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
901
902*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
903are now tagged.
904
905*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
906variables are tagged.
907
908*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
909
8dc78b52
FP
910*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
911for PSWrap.
79214ddf 912
f6737cde
GM
913** Changes in etags.el
914
3f6e4b8b
GM
915*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
916tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
917is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
918
f6737cde
GM
919*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
920the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
921
922If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
923FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
924TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
925obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
926
927TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
928
929FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
930List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
931
932A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
933
934 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
935 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
936 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
937
938*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
939of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
940
941*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
942names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
943
fbc164de
PE
944** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
945and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
946LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
947
59c1bf85
DL
948** New language environments `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
949These correspond respectively to the ISO character sets 8859-14
950(Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). There is
951currently no specific input method support for them.
952
e33b0397
DL
953** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sqeuence-nos' to
954remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
955appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
956
957** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
958
6f8ea2ae
DL
959** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
960
c0510d27
GM
961** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps'
962containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
963expression from that list, are not checked.
964
a933dad1
DL
965** New modes and packages
966
5cb6a58e
SM
967*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
968package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
969be more robust while offering the same functionality.
970
578979ee
GM
971*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
972facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
973separate Texinfo file.
974
dc1178bf
SM
975*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine
976or by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
977provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS.
978It comes with log-view-mode to view RCS and SCCS logs and log-edit-mode
979used to enter checkin log messages.
980
6abca616
EZ
981*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
982without invoking external programs.
983
984The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
985and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
986`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
987is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 988Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
989
990The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
991page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
992
5e5dff44
GM
993*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
994authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
995
996The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
997the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
998the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
999Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1000even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1001single step.
1002
1003On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1004matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1005probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1006contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1007
f7136ee8
GM
1008*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1009unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1010actually modifying content of a buffer.
1011
bbd9b566
GM
1012*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1013PostScript.
1014
1015Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1016
1017The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1018
1019 ; comment (until end of line)
1020 A non-terminal
1021 "C" terminal
1022 ?C? special
1023 $A default non-terminal
1024 $"C" default terminal
1025 $?C? default special
1026 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1027 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1028 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1029 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1030 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1031 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1032 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1033 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1034 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1035 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1036 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1037 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1038 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1039 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1040 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1041
1042Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1043
99453a38
GM
1044*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1045align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1046determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1047example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1048equal signs of assignments.
1049
559cee90
DL
1050*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1051paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1052
6448a6b3
GM
1053*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1054list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1055buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1056customize the package.
1057
249652b1
GM
1058*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1059replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1060is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1061and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1062not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1063which answers different needs.
1064
3476b54a
GM
1065*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1066suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1067expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1068course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1069reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1070to be enabled.
1071
8964fec7
SM
1072*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1073containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1074
a933dad1
DL
1075*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1076
1077*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1078
1079*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1080
1081*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1082Pascal) language.
1083
1084*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1085the text at point.
1086
1087*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1088
8d54eb69
DL
1089*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1090
a933dad1
DL
1091*** whitespace.el ???
1092
ebcfda83
GM
1093*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1094files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1095(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1096interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1097often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1098uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1099codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1100
1101*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1102
1103Here is an example of columns:
1104
1105horse apple bus
1106dog pineapple car EXTRA
1107porcupine strawberry airplane
1108
1109Doing the following settings:
1110
1111 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1112 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1113 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1114 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1115
1116
1117Selecting the lines above and typing:
1118
1119 M-x delimit-columns-region
1120
1121It results:
1122
1123[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1124[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1125[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1126
1127delim-col has the following options:
1128
1129 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1130 before all columns.
1131
1132 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1133 between each column.
1134
1135 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1136 after all columns.
1137
1138 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1139 each column.
1140
1141delim-col has the following commands:
1142
1143 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1144 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1145
f507826c
GM
1146*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
1147were operated on recently. When enabled, a new "Open Recent" submenu
1148is displayed in the "Files" menu.
1149
1150The recent files list is automatically saved across Emacs sessions.
1151
1152To enable/disable recentf use M-x recentf-mode.
1153
1154To enable recentf at Emacs startup use
1155M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET.
1156
1157To change the number of recent files displayed and others options use
1158M-x customize-group RET recentf RET.
1159
8062f458
DL
1160*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1161text.
1162
36e24b82 1163*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1164of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1165specific to Message mode.
1166
36e24b82
DL
1167*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1168viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1169with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1170
aaa659ef
DL
1171*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1172interface to access directory servers using different directory
1173protocols. It has a separate manual.
1174
eee54b0e
DL
1175*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1176for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1177
612839b6
GM
1178*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1179
1180*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
1181minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1182
399da7e3
DL
1183*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1184with the diary features.
1185
6e417ca5
DL
1186*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1187numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1188
a933dad1
DL
1189** Withdrawn packages
1190
1191*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1192functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1193
3261c1d8
DL
1194*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1195
1196*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1197
1198\f
1199* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1200(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1201
80c05bd3 1202** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1203of a primitive.
1204
80c05bd3
DL
1205** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1206buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1207This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1208than replacing the local map.
1209
4bc7a543
DL
1210** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
1211satisfying one of a list of specifications.
1212
1213** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1214after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1215
1216** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1217
a933dad1
DL
1218\f
1219* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1220
1221Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1222--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1223When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1224so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1225
399da7e3 1226+++
f0124b4a
DL
1227** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
1228that offset in the file before writing.
1229
3bbc50af
DL
1230** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1231promised long ago.
1232
7464346d
GM
1233** The function `add-minor-mode' simplifies the definition of minor
1234modes.
1235
c94f4677 1236- Function: add-minor-mode TOGGLE NAME &optional KEYMAP AFTER TOGGLE-FUN
7464346d 1237
c94f4677
GM
1238Register a new minor mode.
1239
1240TOGGLE is a symbol which is the name of a buffer-local variable that
1241is toggled on or off to say whether the minor mode is active or not.
1242
1243NAME specifies what will appear in the mode line when the minor mode
1244is active. NAME should be either a string starting with a space, or a
1245symbol whose value is such a string.
1246
1247Optional KEYMAP is the keymap for the minor mode that will be added
1248to `minor-mode-map-alist'.
1249
1250Optional AFTER specifies that TOGGLE should be added after AFTER
1251in `minor-mode-alist'.
1252
1253Optional TOGGLE-FUN is there for compatiblity with other Emacssen.
1254It is currently not used.
7464346d 1255
612839b6
GM
1256** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1257`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1258from which the command was issued.
1259
1260** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1261`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1262`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1263additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1264operate on.
1265
271b4185
GM
1266** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1267to `window-buffer-height'.
1268
1269- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1270
1271Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1272The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1273lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1274
1275Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1276respectively.
1277
1278If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1279COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1280
1281The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1282obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1283on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1284
1285Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1286buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1287possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1288is currently displayed in some window.
1289
3c30cb6e
DL
1290** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1291argument function's results.
1292
62f20204
GM
1293** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1294signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1295
c0510d27
GM
1296** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1297header is the list of headers passed to it.
1298
1299** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1300ignores differences in case and text representation.
1301
1302** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1303cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1304as follows:
1305
1306 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1307 nil don't display a cursor
1308 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1309 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1310 others display a box cursor.
1311
9a0dd3dc
GM
1312** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1313an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1314defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1315set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1316
d7b511c4 1317** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 1318specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
1319the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1320text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1321
1322Example:
1323
1324 (string-to-syntax "()")
1325 => (4 . 41)
1326
1fa28578
GM
1327** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1328other than 10.
1329
1330*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1331INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1332
1333 #b1111
1334 => 15
1335 #b-1111
1336 => -15
1337
1338*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1339
1340 #o666
1341 => 438
1342
1343*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1344
1345 #xbeef
1346 => 48815
1347
1348*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1349
1350 #2R-111
1351 => -7
1352 #25rah
1353 => 267
1354
3d4ff2dd 1355** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
e9b4e5ff
GM
1356the given property to obtain a a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
1357and isn't a string.
1358
3d4ff2dd
GM
1359** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
1360a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
1361value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
1362not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
1363
16ce590d
DL
1364+++
1365** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
1366
73825616 1367** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
1368for a regexp in a string.
1369
1370** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
1371`mouse-position-function'.
1372
723e779c
GM
1373** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
1374that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
1375
d1e103b2
GM
1376** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
1377Keywords are now always considered constants.
1378
31047e0d
DL
1379+++
1380** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
1381returns it.
1382
7a85e4df
GM
1383** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
1384returned by function `recent-keys'.
1385
02b14400
RS
1386+++
1387** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
1388can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
1389Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
1390etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
1391mode.
404fa7d6 1392
02b14400 1393+++
8964fec7
SM
1394** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
1395and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
1396
02b14400
RS
1397+++
1398** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
1399has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
1400function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
1401returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
1402been performed."
1403
1404When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
1405and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
1406hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
1407then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 1408
02b14400 1409+++
81da8b32
GM
1410** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
1411In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
1412and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
1413
02b14400 1414+++
9e207b90
GM
1415** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
1416with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
1417specified table.
1418
1419 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
1420
1421Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
1422TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
1423saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
1424what BODY returns.
9e207b90 1425
02b14400 1426+++
d7f89643 1427** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 1428Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 1429
02b14400 1430+++
dde9e75a
GM
1431** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
1432removed since it wasn't used by anything.
1433
02b14400 1434+++
9da30515
GM
1435** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
1436instead of being optional.
1437
02b14400 1438+++
d20679eb
GM
1439** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
1440modify read-only text.
1441
02b14400 1442+++
fbc164de
PE
1443** New functions and variables for locales.
1444
1445The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
1446decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
1447time functions like strftime. The new variables
1448`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
1449locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
1450
1451The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
1452environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
1453the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
1454environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
1455not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
1456`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
1457`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 1458
02b14400 1459+++
863476d1
SM
1460** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
1461To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
1462modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
1463start sequences.
1464
02b14400 1465+++
ef6d912c
GM
1466** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
1467because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
1468
02b14400 1469+++
a933dad1
DL
1470** New function `propertize'
1471
1472The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
1473strings with text properties.
1474
1475- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
1476
1477Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
1478by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
1479PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
1480specified value of that property. Example:
1481
1482 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
1483
1484+++
1485** push and pop macros.
1486
02b14400
RS
1487Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
1488are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
1489as the place that holds the list to be changed.
1490
1491(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
1492(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
1493 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
1494
02b14400
RS
1495** New dolist and dotimes macros.
1496
6c7fd5aa
RS
1497Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
1498are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
1499
1500(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
1501 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
1502 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
1503 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1504
1505(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
1506 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
1507 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
1508 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1509
a933dad1
DL
1510+++
1511** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
1512as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
1513
1514[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
1515[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
1516[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
1517[:blank:] matches space and tab only
1518[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
1519 space, and DEL.
1520[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
1521 and DEL.
1522[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
1523 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1524 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1525[:alpha:] matches letters.
1526 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1527 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1528[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
1529[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
1530[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
1531[:punct:] matches punctuation.
1532 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1533 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
1534[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
1535[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
1536[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
1537
1538+++
1539** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
1540
1541The following functions are defined for hash tables:
1542
1543- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
1544
1545The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
1546are optional. The following arguments are defined:
1547
1548:test TEST
1549
1550TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
1551Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
1552it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
1553
1554:size SIZE
1555
1556SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
1557many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
1558
1559:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
1560
1561REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
1562full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
1563size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
15641.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
1565old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
1566
1567:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
1568
1569THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
1570hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
1571(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
1572
1573:weakness WEAK
1574
1575WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t.
1576Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if
1577their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the
1578hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
1579
1580- Function: makehash &optional TEST
1581
1582Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
1583
1584- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
1585
1586Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
1587
1588- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
1589
1590Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
1591values are shared.
1592
1593- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
1594
1595Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
1596
1597- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1598
1599Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
1600
1601- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
1602
1603Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
1604
1605- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1606
1607Returns the size of TABLE.
1608
1609- Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE
1610
1611Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
1612
1613- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
1614
1615Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
1616
1617- Function: clrhash TABLE
1618
1619Clear TABLE.
1620
1621- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
1622
1623Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
1624not found.
1625
79214ddf 1626- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
1627
1628Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
1629another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
1630
1631- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
1632
1633Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
1634
1635- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
1636
1637Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
1638arguments KEY and VALUE.
1639
1640- Function: sxhash OBJ
1641
1642Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
1643
1644- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
1645
1646Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
1647a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 1648comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
1649and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
1650of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
1651
1652TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
1653
1654HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
1655code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
1656integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
1657
1658Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
1659be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
1660
1661 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
1662 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
1663
1664 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
1665 (sxhash (upcase a)))
1666
79214ddf 1667 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
1668 'case-fold-string-hash))
1669
1670 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
1671
1672+++
1673** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
1674
1675It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
1676circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
1677a cons cell which is its own cdr.
1678
1679+++
1680** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
1681
1682If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
1683#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
1684
a933dad1
DL
1685+++
1686** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
1687t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
1688specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
1689is too short to reach that column.
1690
1691+++
1692** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
1693now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
1694after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
1695two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
1696
1697If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
1698perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
1699and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
1700
1701+++
1702** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
1703to specify which buffer to return the size of.
1704
1705+++
1706** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
1707calendar-move-hook after moving point.
1708
1709+++
1710** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
1711directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
1712small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
1713small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
1714temporary-file-directory instead.
1715
1716+++
1717** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
1718the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
1719`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
1720hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
1721
1722+++
1723** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
1724elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
1725
1726+++
1727** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
1728
1729make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
1730creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
1731ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
1732
1733+++
1734** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
1735
1736The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
1737on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
1738is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
1739never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
1740ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
1741overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
1742
1743If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
1744that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
1745to get an error if the file exists at that time.
1746The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
1747
1748+++
1749** Function `format' now handles text properties.
1750
1751Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
1752If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
1753ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
1754result string.
1755
1756Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
1757string where arguments appear in the result string.
1758
1759Example:
1760
1761 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
1762 (s2 "world"))
1763 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
1764 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 1765 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
1766
1767results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
1768
1769+++
1770** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
1771
1772Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
1773The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
1774argument in it.
1775
1776 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
1777 (arg "world"))
1778 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
1779 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
1780 (message msg arg))
1781
1782+++
1783** Sound support
1784
1785Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
1786(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
1787
1788Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
1789(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
1790to enable sound support.
1791
1792Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
1793list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
1794when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
1795functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
1796sound to play, before playing the sound.
1797
1798The following sound properties are supported:
1799
1800- `:file FILE'
1801
1802FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
1803searched relative to `data-directory'.
1804
6fb40beb
GM
1805- `:data DATA'
1806
1807DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
1808may be present, but not both.
1809
a933dad1
DL
1810- `:volume VOLUME'
1811
1812VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
18130..1. This property is optional.
1814
1815Other properties are ignored.
1816
1817** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
1818
1819** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
1820a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
1821
1822** Changes to garbage collection
1823
1824*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
1825of live and free strings.
1826
1827*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
1828strings that have been consed so far.
1829
a933dad1 1830\f
04545643
GM
1831* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
1832Lisp Manual
1833
1834** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center'.
1835
1836When this property is specified, the image is vertically centered
1837around a centerline which would be the vertical center of text drawn
1838at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
1839properties and overlays that apply to the image.
1840
1841\f
a933dad1
DL
1842* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
1843
1844Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1845--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1846When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1847so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1848
f6d3257b
GM
1849** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
1850to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
1851
1852Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
1853text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
1854is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
1855your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
1856laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
1857just display it black instead.
1858
1859This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
1860a line like
1861
1862 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
1863
1864in your `.emacs'.
1865
a933dad1
DL
1866** New face implementation.
1867
1868Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
1869font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
1870
1871+++
1872*** New faces.
1873
1874Each face can specify the following display attributes:
1875
1876 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 1877
a933dad1
DL
1878 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
1879 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 1880
a933dad1 1881 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 1882
a933dad1 1883 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 1884
a933dad1 1885 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 1886
a933dad1 1887 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 1888
a933dad1
DL
1889 7. Background color.
1890
1891 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
1892
1893 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
1894
1895 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
1896
1897 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
1898
1899 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
1900 color.
1901
1902 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
1903 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
1904
1905Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
1906same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
1907frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
1908faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
1909with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
1910attributes mentioned above.
1911
1912There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
1913definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
1914created frames.
79214ddf 1915
a933dad1
DL
1916A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
1917have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
1918`fully-specified'.
1919
1920+++
1921*** Face merging.
1922
1923The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
1924combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
1925aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
1926properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
1927that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
1928results in a fully-specified face.
1929
1930+++
1931*** Face realization.
1932
1933After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
1934merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
1935realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
1936available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
1937face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
1938cache of the frame on which it was realized.
1939
1940Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
1941character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
1942for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
1943charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
1944
1945Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
1946specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
1947being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
1948the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
1949statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
1950
1951In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
1952`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
19530x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
1954the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
1955initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
1956Emacs.
1957
1958Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
1959`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
1960registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
1961with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
1962
1963++++
1964**** Clearing face caches.
1965
1966The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
1967on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
1968unused fonts.
1969
1970+++
1971*** Font selection.
79214ddf 1972
a933dad1
DL
1973Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
1974given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
1975for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
1976
1977If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
1978pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
1979family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
1980property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
1981an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
1982
1983Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
1984against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
1985match for the given face attributes in this font list.
1986
1987Font selection can be influenced by the user.
1988
1989The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
1990attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
1991face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
1992names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
1993that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
1994width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
1995to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
1996
1997Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
1998specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
1999face doesn't exist.
2000
2001+++
2002**** Scalable fonts
2003
2004Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2005since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2006servers.
2007
2008To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2009`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2010scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2011Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2012scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2013that list. Example:
2014
2015 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2016
2017allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2018
2019+++
2020*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2021
2022- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2023
2024Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2025is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2026string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2027
2028If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2029the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2030FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2031POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2032SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2033These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2034if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2035REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2036the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2037of the face font sort order.
2038
79214ddf 2039- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2040
2041Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2042omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2043(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2044non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2045
2046- Variable: font-list-limit
2047
2048Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2049won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2050matching font. The default is currently 100.
2051
2052+++
2053*** Setting face attributes.
2054
2055For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2056with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2057implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2058`face-attribute'.
2059
2060Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2061symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2062
2063The following attributes are recognized:
2064
2065`:family'
2066
2067VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2068or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2069and `?' are allowed.
2070
2071`:width'
2072
2073VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2074It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2075`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2076`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2077
2078`:height'
2079
2080VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
20811/10 pt.
2082
2083`:weight'
2084
2085VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2086symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2087`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2088
2089`:slant'
2090
2091VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2092symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2093`reverse-oblique'.
2094
2095`:foreground', `:background'
2096
2097VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2098
2099`:underline'
2100
2101VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2102VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2103a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2104don't underline.
2105
2106`:overline'
2107
2108VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2109VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2110string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2111overline.
2112
2113`:strike-through'
2114
2115VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2116striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2117face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2118is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2119
2120`:box'
2121
2122VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2123around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2124VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2125of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2126and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2127VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2128:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2129the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2130specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2131defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2132the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2133color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2134should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2135like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2136that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2137the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2138box.
2139
2140`:inverse-video'
2141
2142VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2143inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2144
2145`:stipple'
2146
2147If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2148The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2149searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2150HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2151is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2152explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2153
2154For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2155and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2156
2157`:font'
2158
2159Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2160XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2161is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2162versions of Emacs.
2163
2164For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2165be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2166must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2167
2168Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2169`defface'.
2170
2171*** Face attributes and X resources
2172
2173The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2174from X resources:
2175
2176 Face attribute X resource class
2177-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2178 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2179 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2180 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2181 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2182 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2183 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2184 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2185 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2186 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2187 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2188 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2189 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2190 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2191 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2192 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2193 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2194 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2195 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2196 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2197
2198+++
2199*** Text property `face'.
2200
2201The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2202specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2203specification can be
2204
22051. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2206
22072. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2208 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2209 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2210 for face attribute names.
2211
22123. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2213 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2214 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2215
2216+++
2217** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2218
acf3ecb7
EZ
2219The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2220on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2221the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2222default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2223`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2224used to clear the mapping table.
2225
acf3ecb7
EZ
2226** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2227
2228The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2229and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2230type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2231color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2232display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2233old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2234`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2235compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2236should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2237modify their color-related behavior.
2238
2239The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2240any frame type.
2241
8a5719f0
EZ
2242** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2243
2244The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2245`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2246`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2247`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2248`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2249`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2250display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2251the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2252platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2253
a933dad1
DL
2254+++
2255** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2256
463cac2d 2257This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2258
2259The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2260end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2261Otherwise, it returns zero.
2262
463cac2d
GM
2263** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2264
2265There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2266buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
2267text-property.
2268
9a9dfda8 2269Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2270forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2271to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2272not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2273commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2274boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2275`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2276functions.
463cac2d
GM
2277
2278Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2279a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2280editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2281
9a9dfda8
GM
2282The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2283
2284- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE
2285
2286Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
2287A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2288If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2289constrained position if that is is different.
2290
2291If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2292positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2293ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
2294constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property
2295as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2296is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
2297fields.
2298
2299If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2300NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2301unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2302C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2303only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2304
2305- Function: erase-field &optional POS
2306
2307Erases the field surrounding POS.
2308A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2309If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2310
2311- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2312
2313Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
2314A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2315If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2316If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an
2317field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
2318
2319- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2320
2321Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
2322A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2323If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2324If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field,
2325then the end of the *following* field is returned.
2326
2327- Function: field-string &optional POS
2328
2329Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
2330A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2331If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2332
2333- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
2334
2335Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
2336A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2337If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2338
a933dad1
DL
2339+++
2340** Image support.
2341
2342Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
2343strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
2344(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
2345replaces the display of the characters having that property.
2346
2347If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
2348`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
2349AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
2350window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
2351area.
2352
2353IMAGE is an image specification.
2354
2355*** Image specifications
2356
2357Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
2358is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
2359specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
2360symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
2361described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
2362
2363The following is a list of properties all image types share.
2364
2365`:ascent ASCENT'
2366
576da55d
GM
2367ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
2368If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
2369to use for its ascent.
2370
2371If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
2372image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
2373
04545643
GM
2374If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
2375centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
2376of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
2377overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
2378
2379`:margin MARGIN'
2380
79214ddf 2381MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
2382margin around the image. Default is 0.
2383
2384`:relief RELIEF'
2385
2386RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
2387around an image.
2388
2389`:algorithm ALGO'
2390
2391Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
2392be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
2393supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
2394which is intended to display images "disabled."
2395
2396`:heuristic-mask BG'
2397
2398If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
2399background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
2400determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
2401corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
2402the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
2403be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
2404background of the image.
2405
2406`:file FILE'
2407
2408Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
2409search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
2410building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
2411may be present in the image specification.
2412
518df5c4
GM
2413`:data DATA'
2414
2415Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
2416supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
2417present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
2418support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
2419
a933dad1
DL
2420*** Supported image types
2421
b246b1f6 2422**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
2423
2424XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
2425properties supported are
2426
2427`:foreground FG'
2428
2429FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
2430is the frame's foreground.
2431
2432`:background FG'
2433
2434BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
2435the frame's background color.
2436
2437XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
2438case, the image specification must contain the following properties
2439instead of a `:file' property.
2440
2441`:width WIDTH'
2442
2443WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
2444
2445`:height HEIGHT'
2446
2447HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
2448
2449`:data DATA'
2450
2451DATA must be either
2452
2453 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
2454 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
2455
2456 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
2457
2458 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
2459 bitmap.
2460
c76e04a8
GM
2461 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
2462 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
2463 in the file.
2464
a933dad1
DL
2465**** XPM, image type `xpm'
2466
2467XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
2468`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
2469found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
2470`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
2471
2472Additional image properties supported are:
2473
2474`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
2475
2476SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
2477name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
2478name.
2479
2480XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
2481add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
2482
a933dad1
DL
2483The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
2484to display compressed images.
2485
2486**** PBM, image type `pbm'
2487
2488PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2489mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
2490defined.
2491
2492**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
2493
2494Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
2495package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
2496are:
2497
a933dad1
DL
2498**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
2499
2500Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
2501package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2502properties defined.
2503
2504**** GIF, image type `gif'
2505
2506Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
2507`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
2508
2509Additional image properties supported are:
2510
2511`:index INDEX'
2512
2513INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
2514multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
2515
2516This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
2517For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
2518at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
2519every 0.1 seconds.
2520
2521(defun show-anim (file max)
2522 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
2523 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
2524
2525(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
2526 (when (= idx max)
2527 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 2528 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
2529 (save-excursion
2530 (set-buffer buffer)
2531 (goto-char (point-min))
2532 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
2533 (insert-image img "x"))
2534 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
2535
2536**** PNG, image type `png'
2537
2538Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
2539package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2540properties defined.
2541
2542**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
2543
2544Additional image properties supported are:
2545
2546`:pt-width WIDTH'
2547
2548WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 2549integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
2550
2551`:pt-height HEIGHT'
2552
2553HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 2554must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
2555
2556`:bounding-box BOX'
2557
2558BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
2559the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
2560files. This is an required property.
2561
2562Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
2563lisp/gs.el.
2564
2565*** Lisp interface.
2566
79214ddf
FP
2567The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
2568which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
2569
2570Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
2571they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
2572The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
2573manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
2574images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
2575
2576*** Simplified image API, image.el
2577
2578The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
2579creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
2580can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
2581define an image based on available image types. The functions
2582`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
2583buffer.
2584
2585+++
2586** Display margins.
2587
2588Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
2589and images.
2590
2591To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
2592`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
2593`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
2594obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
2595`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
2596the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
2597of the display margins.
2598
2599You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
2600containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
2601one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
2602string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
2603in this file).
2604
2605+++
2606** Help display
2607
2608Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
2609moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
2610`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
2611that have a `help-echo' property.
2612
2613The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar
2614items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display.
2615If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is
2616evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the
2617tool-bar item is used.
2618
2619The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
2620help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the
2621help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
2622
2623+++
2624** Vertical fractional scrolling.
2625
2626The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
2627This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
2628
2629The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
2630scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
2631The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
2632scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
2633used.
2634
79214ddf
FP
2635 (global-set-key [A-down]
2636 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 2637 (interactive)
79214ddf 2638 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 2639 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 2640 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
2641 #'(lambda ()
2642 (interactive)
79214ddf 2643 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
2644 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
2645
2646+++
2647** New hook `fontification-functions'.
2648
2649Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
2650when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
2651variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
2652is called with one argument, POS.
2653
2654At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
2655characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
2656as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
2657property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
2658`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
2659
2660+++
2661** Tool bar support.
2662
2663Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
2664parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
2665controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
2666suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
2667`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
2668automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
2669
2670*** Tool bar item definitions
2671
2672Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
2673`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
2674where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 2675
a933dad1
DL
2676CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
2677evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
2678the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
2679property (see below).
79214ddf 2680
a933dad1
DL
2681BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
2682binding are currently ignored.
2683
2684The following properties are recognized:
2685
2686`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 2687
a933dad1
DL
2688FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
2689or disabled.
79214ddf 2690
a933dad1 2691`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 2692
a933dad1 2693FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 2694
a933dad1
DL
2695`:filter FUNCTION'
2696
2697FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
2698FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
2699used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 2700
a933dad1
DL
2701`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
2702
2703TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
2704and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 2705
a933dad1
DL
2706`:image IMAGES'
2707
2708IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
2709image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
2710meaning of each of the four elements:
2711
2712 Index Use when item is
2713 ----------------------------------------
2714 0 enabled and selected
2715 1 enabled and deselected
2716 2 disabled and selected
2717 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 2718
4ba7246d
GM
2719If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
2720algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
2721
a933dad1 2722`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 2723
a933dad1
DL
2724Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
2725is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
2726
2727*** Tool-bar-related variables.
2728
2729If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
2730resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
2731than 1/4 of the frame's size.
2732
79214ddf 2733If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
2734raised when the mouse moves over them.
2735
2736You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
2737`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
2738pixels. Default is 1.
2739
2740You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
2741`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
2742
2743*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
2744
2745You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 2746a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
2747
2748 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
2749 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
2750 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
2751
2752is the original tool bar item definition, then
2753
2754 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
2755
2756makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
2757item.
2758
2759** Mode line changes.
2760
2761+++
2762*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
2763
2764The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
2765that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
2766a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
2767
27681. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
2769a `local-map' text property.
2770
27712. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
2772that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
2773
27743. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
2775is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
2776`local-map' property.
2777
2778The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
2779properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
2780example.
2781
54522c9f
GM
2782*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
2783evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
2784
a933dad1
DL
2785+++
2786*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
2787variable mode-line-format to nil.
2788
2789+++
2790*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
2791
2792This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
2793`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
2794completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
2795`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
2796line.
2797
2798The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
2799`header-line'.
2800
2801The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
2802position in the header-line.
2803
2804+++
2805** Text property `display'
2806
2807The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
2808also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
2809`display' property should be a display specification, as described
2810below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
2811
2812*** Variable width and height spaces
2813
2814To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
2815specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
2816`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
2817area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
2818marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
2819displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
2820simpler form STRETCH as property value.
2821
2822The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
2823PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
2824properties described below.
2825
2826The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
2827characters having the `display' property.
2828
2829- :width WIDTH
2830
2831Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
2832character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
2833
2834- :relative-width FACTOR
2835
2836Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
2837first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
2838same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
2839width of that character by FACTOR.
2840
2841- :align-to HPOS
2842
2843Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
2844value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
2845
2846Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
2847
2848- :height HEIGHT
2849
2850Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
2851normal line height.
2852
2853- :relative-height FACTOR
2854
2855The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
2856of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
2857
2858- :ascent ASCENT
2859
2860Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
2861used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
2862baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
2863equal to 100.
2864
2865You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
2866
2867*** Images
2868
2869A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
2870. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
2871in the display, the characters having this display specification in
2872their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
2873the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
2874`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
2875area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
2876the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
2877as display specification.
2878
2879*** Other display properties
2880
2881- :space-width FACTOR
2882
2883Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
2884should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
2885integer or float.
2886
2887- :height HEIGHT
2888
2889Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
2890
2891If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
2892means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
2893the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
2894``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
2895a font is available counts as a step.
2896
2897If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
2898as tall as the frame's default font.
2899
2900If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
2901height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
2902
2903Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
2904`height' bound to the current specified font height.
2905
2906- :raise FACTOR
2907
2908FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
2909font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
2910raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
2911amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
2912`:height' subproperty.
2913
2914*** Conditional display properties
2915
2916All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
2917has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
2918applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
2919During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
2920the text having the `display' property.
2921
2922The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
2923`(:when t SPEC)'.
2924
2925+++
2926** New menu separator types.
2927
2928Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
2929item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
2930treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
2931to specify other menu separator types.
2932
2933- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
2934
2935No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
2936separator occurs.
2937
2938- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
2939
2940A single line in the menu's foreground color.
2941
2942- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
2943
2944A double line in the menu's foreground color.
2945
2946- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
2947
2948A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
2949
2950- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
2951
2952A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
2953
2954- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
2955
2956A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
2957displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
2958
2959- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
2960
2961A single line with 3D raised appearance.
2962
2963- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
2964
2965A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
2966
2967- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
2968
2969A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
2970
2971- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
2972
2973Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
2974
2975- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
2976
2977Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
2978
2979- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
2980
2981Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
2982
2983- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
2984
2985Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
2986
2987Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
2988the corresponding single-line separators.
2989
2990+++
2991** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
2992
2993The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
2994`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
2995Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
2996that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
2997default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
2998default background is the background color of the frame, and the
2999default foreground is black.
3000
3001The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3002(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3003`ScrollBarBackground').
3004
3005Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3006settings for scroll bar colors.
3007
3008+++
3009** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3010display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3011
3012---
3013** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3014starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3015on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3016line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3017the original window start.
3018
3019---
3020** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3021`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3022now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3023
3024+++
3025** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3026
3027A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3028`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3029windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3030other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3031
3032The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3033fixed-width and fixed-height.
3034
3035 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3036
3037A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3038fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3039window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3040change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3041temporarily to nil, for example
3042
3043 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3044 (enlarge-window 10))
3045
79214ddf 3046Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3047or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3048
3049** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3050terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3051to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3052overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3053horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3054support a vertical-bar cursor).
e33b0397
DL
3055^L
3056* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3057
3058** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3059M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
a933dad1
DL
3060\f
3061* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3062
3063** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3064
3065You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3066Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3067`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3068
3069If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3070is the one that is used.
3071
3072** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3073the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3074Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3075separate from the command's regular output.
3076Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3077says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3078In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3079the buffer name.
3080
3081When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3082output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3083it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3084cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3085
3086** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3087the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3088is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3089created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3090
3091** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3092example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3093match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3094quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3095
3096** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
3097now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
3098if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
3099they never ignore case.
3100
3101** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
3102under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
3103applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
3104of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
3105just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
3106convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
3107part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
3108
3109If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
3110the same format that was used in the file before.
3111
3112You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
3113`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
3114
3115** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
3116renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
3117This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
3118
3119** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
3120The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
3121buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
3122your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
3123is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
3124end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
3125Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
3126
3127The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
3128eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
3129control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
3130format. You can now customize these variables.
3131
3132** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
3133filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3134filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3135enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3136
3137** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3138in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3139windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3140
3141** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3142dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3143doesn't have any effect.
3144
3145** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3146not one per buffer.
3147
3148** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3149use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3150 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3151
3152** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3153To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3154`auto-show-mode' command.
3155
3156** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3157avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3158versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3159choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3160occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3161
3162** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3163cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3164
3165** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3166character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3167feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3168
3169** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3170the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3171interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3172and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3173
3174** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3175
3176The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3177that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3178one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3179codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3180set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3181
3182Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3183from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3184
3185IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3186equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3187a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3188`?' on other systems.
3189
3190IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3191feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3192Unix.
3193
3194Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3195current codepage when it starts.
3196
3197** Mail changes
3198
feab4fba
GM
3199*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3200`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3201appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3202non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3203MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3204headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3205latin-1:
3206
3207 MIME-version: 1.0
3208 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3209 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3210
a933dad1
DL
3211*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3212default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3213default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3214sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3215buffer-file-coding-system.
3216
3217You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
3218sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
3219mail.
3220
3221*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
3222if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
3223Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
3224list of possible coding systems.
3225
3226** CC Mode changes
3227
3228*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
3229modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
3230longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
3231docstring for details.
3232
3233*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
3234symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
3235found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
3236prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
3237lineup functions use this feature currently.
3238
3239*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
3240"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
3241
3242*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
3243"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
3244
3245*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
3246from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
3247symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
3248c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
3249anonymous classes.
3250
3251*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
3252syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
3253
3254*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
3255inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
3256support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
3257function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
3258
3259*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
3260(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
3261brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
3262c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
3263(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
3264
3265*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
3266
3267*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
3268
3269*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
3270for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
3271
3272*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
3273
3274*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
3275associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
3276This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
3277circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
3278class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
3279
3280** Gnus changes.
3281
3282*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
3283added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
3284Gnus manual for the full story.
3285
3286*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
3287before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
3288group, which is created automatically.
3289
3290*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
3291values.
3292
3293*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
3294
3295*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
3296outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
3297
3298*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
3299`C-u C-c C-c'.
3300
3301*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
3302
3303*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
3304re-highlighting of the article buffer.
3305
3306*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
3307
3308*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
3309Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
3310
3311*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
3312`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
3313
3314*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
3315control over simplification.
3316
3317*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
3318
3319*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
3320limit.
3321
3322*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
3323
3324*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
3325
79214ddf 3326*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
a933dad1
DL
3327If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
3328rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
3329
3330*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3331`a' forces normal posting method.
3332
3333*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
3334-- `W d'.
3335
3336*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
3337to a non-nil value.
3338
3339*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
3340where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
3341
3342*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
3343has been added.
3344
3345*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
3346
3347*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
3348
3349*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
3350`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
3351
3352*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
3353`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
3354
3355*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
3356
3357*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
3358been added.
3359
3360*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
3361`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
3362
3363*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
3364updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
3365
3366*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
3367
3368*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
3369
3370*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
3371
3372** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
3373
3374*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
3375options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
3376nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
3377
3378*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
3379TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
3380of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
3381TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
3382can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
3383
3384*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
3385All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
3386but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
3387the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
3388
3389*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
3390the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
3391buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
3392mismatch.
3393
3394** Changes to RefTeX mode
3395
3396*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
3397file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
3398
3399*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
3400lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
3401characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
3402removed from the label.
3403
3404*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
3405a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
3406
3407*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
3408customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
3409
3410*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
3411`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
79214ddf 3412expressions.
a933dad1
DL
3413
3414*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
3415
3416** New/deleted modes and packages
3417
3418*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
3419SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
3420
3421*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
3422editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
3423SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
3424
3425*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
3426changes with a special face.
3427
3428*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
3429this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
3430Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
3431\f
3432* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
3433
3434** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
3435This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
3436conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
3437and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
3438check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
3439
3440The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
3441Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
3442distribution when the config.bat script is run.
3443
3444** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
3445MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
3446controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
3447directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
3448Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
3449on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
3450string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
3451program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
3452printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
3453
3454** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
3455output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
3456available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
3457input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
3458temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
3459program.
3460
3461An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
3462and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
3463programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
3464automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
3465as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
3466ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
3467
3468** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
3469a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
3470MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
3471was not documented clearly before.
3472
3473** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
3474This includes Tetris and Snake.
3475\f
3476* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
3477
3478** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
3479return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
3480They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
3481meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
3482
3483** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
3484WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
3485and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
3486
3487** Changes in the file-attributes function.
3488
3489*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
3490It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
3491
3492*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
3493the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
3494integers.
3495
3496** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
3497files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
3498arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
3499file names and attributes are returned.
3500
3501** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
3502sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
3503accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
3504It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
3505returns the result.
3506
3507** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
3508to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
3509
3510** New functions for base64 conversion:
3511
3512The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
3513into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
3514performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
3515optionally.
3516
3517Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
3518job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
3519
3520**
3521The new function process-running-child-p
3522will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
3523terminal to its own child process.
3524
3525** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
3526when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
3527to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
3528itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
3529
3530** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
3531be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
3532
3533** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
3534:included is an alias for :visible.
3535
3536easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
3537easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
3538to move or copy menu entries.
3539
3540** Multibyte editing changes
3541
3542*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
3543an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
3544make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
3545work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
3546char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
3547 (setq char (sref str idx)
3548 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
3549The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
3550
3551If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
3552(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
3553 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
3554
3555*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
3556region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
3557deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
3558
3559 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
3560
3561This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
3562across the boundary.
3563
3564*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
3565`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
3566 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
3567 contains 8-bit characters.
3568 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
3569 contains invalid characters.
3570
3571*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
3572text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
3573preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
3574text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
3575way.
3576
3577*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
3578If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
3579end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
3580prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
3581
3582*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
3583compose Thai characters in a string.
3584
3585** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
3586argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
3587for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
3588menus should always use the third argument.
3589
3590** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
3591read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
3592arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
3593input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
3594
3595** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
3596of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
3597programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
3598inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
3599
3600** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
3601the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
3602returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
3603echo area contents.
3604
3605 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
3606
3607** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
3608NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
3609requested feature cannot be loaded.
3610
3611** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
3612foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
79214ddf 3613means to clear out that attribute.
a933dad1
DL
3614
3615** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
3616gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
3617
3618** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
3619read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
3620unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
3621end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
3622
3623** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
3624the gap of the current buffer.
3625
3626** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
3627to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
3628current buffer.
3629
3630** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
3631facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
3632These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
3633it back in after any modifications have been made.
3634\f
3635* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
3636
3637** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
3638the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
3639/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
3640directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
3641subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
3642
3643Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
3644names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
3645Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
3646which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
3647these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
3648
3649Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
3650starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
3651time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
3652
3653This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
3654Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
3655to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
3656subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
3657`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
3658results.
3659
3660** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
3661GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
3662that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
3663fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
3664\f
3665* Changes in Emacs 20.3
3666
3667** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
3668including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
3669it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
3670perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
3671
3672** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
3673specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
3674region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
3675further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
3676command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
3677within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
3678are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
3679region.
3680
3681In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
3682selective undo.
3683
3684** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
3685unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
3686buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
3687effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
3688Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
3689
3690The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
3691though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
3692-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
3693load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
3694
3695** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
3696no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
3697enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
3698something that most users not do.
3699
3700** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
3701operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
3702The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
3703applications.
3704
3705C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
3706pasting operations.
3707
3708** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
3709setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
3710like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
3711printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
3712`ps-printer-name'.
3713
3714** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
3715minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
3716any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
3717except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
3718incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
3719hits a new word.
3720
3721Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
3722Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
3723to be confused by TeX commands.
3724
3725You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
3726correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
3727clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
3728of various alternative replacements and actions.
3729
3730Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
3731the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
3732corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
3733alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
3734flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
3735
3736Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
3737flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
3738
3739** Changes in input method usage.
3740
3741Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
3742the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
3743respectively.
3744
3745You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
3746
3747If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
3748of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
3749
3750The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
3751that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
3752
3753 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
3754
3755 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
3756
3757 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
3758 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
3759
3760 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
79214ddf 3761 given in the following case:
a933dad1
DL
3762 o When you are using a complex input method.
3763 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
3764
3765If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
3766input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
3767and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
3768setting it to t is helpful.
3769
3770The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
3771
3772In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
3773keys:
3774 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
3775 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
3776 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
3777These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
3778environment.
3779
3780** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
3781names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
3782minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
3783get
3784
3785 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
3786
3787which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
3788
3789Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
3790Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
3791
3792** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
3793at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
3794its owner and group.
3795
3796** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
3797Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
3798
3799** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
3800contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
3801
3802** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
3803which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
3804in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
3805by the left edge of the rectangle.
3806
3807** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
3808increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
3809C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
3810for writing keyboard macros.
3811
3812** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
3813files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
3814frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
3815the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
3816additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
3817info.
3818
3819** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
3820
3821** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
3822query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
3823contents only.
3824
3825** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
3826confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
3827the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
3828says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
3829
3830** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
3831non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
3832literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
3833
3834** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
3835now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
3836Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
3837inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
3838
3839** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
3840failure if the command produces no output.
3841
3842** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
3843manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
3844the mouse.
3845
3846** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
3847mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
3848function and variable names.
3849
3850** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
3851reading specific files. This has higher priority than
3852file-coding-system-alist.
3853
3854** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
3855t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
3856converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
3857the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
3858according to the current fontset.
3859
3860** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
3861
3862The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
3863that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
3864nonascii-insert-offset.
3865
3866For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
3867enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
3868nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
3869characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
3870
3871** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
3872an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
3873
3874** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
3875letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
3876
3877** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
3878are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
3879command keys.
3880
3881** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
3882user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
3883
3884Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
3885user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
3886all variables that have documentation.
3887
3888** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
3889shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
3890that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
3891minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
3892it should show; the default is 20.
3893
3894Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
3895the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
3896of your input.
3897
3898** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
3899all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
3900recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
3901argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
3902the customizable options which were changed since that version.
3903Newly added options are included as well.
3904
3905If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
3906then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
3907for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
3908
3909This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
3910Customize menu.
3911
3912** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
3913the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
3914
3915** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
3916buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
3917invoked.
3918
3919** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
3920that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
3921The default is 1.
3922
3923** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
3924syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
3925new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
3926(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
3927sensibly.
3928
3929** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
3930
3931** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
3932value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
3933two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
3934
3935** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
3936reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
3937for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
3938every night.
3939
7464346d
GM
3940** Desktop changes
3941
3942*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
a933dad1
DL
3943the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
3944
7464346d
GM
3945*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
3946and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
3947
a933dad1
DL
3948** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
3949read and post multi-lingual articles.
3950
3951** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
3952doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
3953be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
3954outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
3955the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
79214ddf 3956made invisible again.
a933dad1
DL
3957
3958** Mail reading and sending changes
3959
3960*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
3961the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
3962changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
3963toggle.
3964
3965*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
3966now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
3967summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
3968the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
3969rmail-default-body-file.
3970
3971*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
3972longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
3973handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
3974
3975*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
3976it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
3977is evaluated to insert the signature.
3978
3979*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
3980outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
3981handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
3982putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
3983transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
3984especially interested in trying feedmail.
3985
3986feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
3987feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
3988provided by feedmail are:
3989
3990**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
3991stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
3992there is also a queue for draft messages
3993
3994**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
3995be prompted for confirmation
3996
3997**** does smart filling of address headers
3998
3999**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4000the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4001can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4002
4003**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4004the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4005/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4006function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4007
4008** Dired changes
4009
4010*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4011files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4012
4013*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4014run Dired on the directory name at point.
4015
4016*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4017files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4018for a specified regexp.
4019
4020** VC Changes
4021
4022*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4023conveniently.
4024
4025*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4026faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4027Dired.
4028
4029VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
4030directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
4031listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
4032currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
4033
4034You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
4035then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
4036vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
4037control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
4038on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
4039
4040All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
4041is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
4042`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
4043the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
4044`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4045
4046The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4047toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
79214ddf 4048VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
a933dad1
DL
4049`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4050
4051Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4052ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4053command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4054
4055*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4056file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4057session to resolve them.
4058
4059Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4060resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4061contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4062uses as well).
4063
4064*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4065command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4066you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4067either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4068branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4069If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4070using ediff.
4071
4072** Changes in Font Lock
4073
4074*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4075are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4076use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4077unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4078compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4079
4080** Frame name display changes
4081
4082*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4083frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4084raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4085when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4086
4087*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4088frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4089menu.
4090
4091** Comint (subshell) changes
4092
4093*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4094subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4095with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4096
4097*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
4098
4099C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
4100that is, the line after the last line you got.
4101You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
4102
4103C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
4104send the current line together with the following line, when you send
4105the following line.
4106
4107C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
4108which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
4109previously sent input.
4110
4111C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
4112it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
4113as the search string.
4114
4115*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
4116automatically in compilation-mode windows.
4117
4118** C mode changes
4119
4120*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
4121and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
4122assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
79214ddf 4123definition.
a933dad1
DL
4124
4125*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
4126(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
4127Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
4128style is still the default however.
4129
4130*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
4131
4132*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
4133are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
4134them. They do not have key bindings by default.
4135
4136*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
4137and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
4138
4139*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4140namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4141
4142*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4143makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4144
4145*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4146c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4147
4148*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4149should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4150package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4151variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4152
4153** Changes to hippie-expand.
4154
79214ddf 4155*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
a933dad1
DL
4156non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4157which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4158
4159*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4160non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4161expanding dynamically.
4162
4163*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4164non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4165
4166*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4167non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4168this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4169expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4170
4171*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4172
4173** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4174
4175*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4176bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4177automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4178bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4179against the first word in the title.
4180
4181*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4182capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4183bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
79214ddf 4184lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
a933dad1 4185lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
79214ddf 4186bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
a933dad1
DL
4187
4188*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4189generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4190replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4191bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4192
4193** Changes in vcursor.el.
4194
4195*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4196and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4197variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4198entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4199`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4200in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4201
4202*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4203Editing group once the package is loaded.
4204
4205*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4206generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4207vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4208
4209*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4210vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4211
4212** Ispell changes.
4213
79214ddf
FP
4214*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4215buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
a933dad1
DL
4216are identified by syntax tables in effect.
4217
4218*** Generic region skipping implemented.
4219A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
4220and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
4221defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
79214ddf 4222include:
a933dad1
DL
4223
4224 o URLs are automatically skipped
4225 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
4226
4227*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
4228
4229** Changes to RefTeX mode
4230
4231RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
4232large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
4233re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
4234section `Optimizations' in the manual.
4235
4236*** New recursive parser.
4237
4238The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
4239entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
4240recursive parser scans the individual files.
4241
4242*** Parsing only part of a document.
79214ddf 4243
a933dad1
DL
4244Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
4245partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
4246the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
4247
4248 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
4249
4250*** Storing parsing information in a file.
4251
4252This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
4253
4254 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
4255
4256*** Using multiple selection buffers
4257
4258If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
4259for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
4260
4261 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
4262
4263*** References to external documents.
4264
4265The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
4266documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
4267documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
4268macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
4269RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
4270the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
4271The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
4272
4273*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
4274
4275The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
4276and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
4277
4278Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
4279the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
4280
4281*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
4282
4283The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
4284buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
4285
4286*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
4287
4288The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
4289contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
4290`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
4291have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
4292enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
4293at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
4294more.
4295
4296*** Support for the varioref package
4297
4298The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
4299
4300*** New hooks
4301
4302Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
4303and citations are created. These hooks are
4304`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
4305`reftex-format-cite-function'.
4306
4307*** Citations outside LaTeX
4308
4309The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
4310a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
4311
4312*** Short context is no longer fontified.
4313
4314The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
4315fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
4316fontified, use
4317
4318 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
4319
4320** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
4321With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
4322the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
4323directories that contain the same file name.
4324
4325Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
4326Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
4327file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
4328Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
4329have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
4330names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
4331directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
4332directory.
4333
4334** New modes and packages
4335
4336*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
4337It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
4338it, but some do not.
4339
4340*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
4341code.
4342
4343*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
4344current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
4345around in a buffer.
4346
4347Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
4348
4349*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
4350uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
4351be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
4352established system of notation similar to Chess.
4353
4354*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
4355documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
4356guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
4357
4358*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
4359available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
4360system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
4361simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
4362functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
4363the like.
4364
4365*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
4366identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
4367
4368*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
4369within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
4370used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
4371the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
4372
4373*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
4374
4375 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
4376 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
4377 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
4378 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
4379 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
4380 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
4381 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
4382 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
4383 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
4384 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
4385 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
4386
4387 Platform-specific modes:
4388
4389 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
4390 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
4391 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
4392 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
4393 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
4394 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
4395 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
4396 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
4397 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
4398\f
4399* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4400
4401** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
4402use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
4403That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
4404Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
4405
4406Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
4407you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
4408consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
4409
4410** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
4411and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
4412specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
4413searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
4414
4415** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
4416multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
4417character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
4418environment.
4419
4420** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
4421take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
4422string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
4423current input method for reading this one event.
4424
4425** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
4426now control whether to output certain characters as
4427backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
4428non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
4429characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
4430in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
4431\f
4432* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4433
4434** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
4435of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
4436
4437** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
4438in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
4439always increases point by 1.
4440
4441The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
4442considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
4443
4444See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
4445
4446** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
4447Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
4448default value changed. For example,
4449
4450 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
4451 :type 'integer
4452 :group 'foo
4453 :version "20.3")
4454
79214ddf 4455 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
a933dad1
DL
4456 :version "20.3")
4457
4458If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
4459default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
4460is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
4461`:version' in the top level group.
4462
4463This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
4464
4465** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
4466starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
4467
4468However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
4469symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
4470support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
4471to themselves.
4472
4473If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
4474this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
4475values whatever.
4476
4477** There is a new debugger command, R.
4478It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
4479in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
4480
4481** Frame-local variables.
4482
4483You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
4484the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
4485local bindings for that variable.
4486
4487These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
4488frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
4489modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
4490parameter name.
4491
4492Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
4493Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
4494active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
4495that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
4496
4497It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
4498clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
4499very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
4500through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
4501
4502** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
4503"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
4504evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
4505makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
4506See the documentation in sregex.el.
4507
4508** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
4509is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
4510parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
4511The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
4512
4513** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
4514If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
4515
4516** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
4517known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
4518define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
4519
4520** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
4521when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
4522it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
4523history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
4524
4525The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
4526return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
4527empty input.
4528
4529** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
4530for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
4531`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
4532Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
4533`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
4534
4535** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
4536echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
4537a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
4538default password to use if the user enters nothing.
4539
4540** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
4541specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
4542function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
4543place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
4544non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
4545
4546** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
4547If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
4548up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
4549end of the window, even if this requires computation.
4550
4551** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
4552which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
4553If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
4554
4555** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
4556holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
4557was directed to display this buffer.
4558
4559** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
4560with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
4561describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
4562other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
4563set-window-configuration.
4564
4565** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
4566window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
4567positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
4568windows and the choice of buffers to display.
4569
4570** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
4571override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
4572look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
4573
4574If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
4575non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
4576map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
4577
4578minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
4579and it is meant to be set by major modes.
4580
4581** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
4582except that it discards all text properties from the result.
4583
4584** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
4585USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
4586floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
4587
4588** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
4589to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
4590in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
4591it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
4592
4593** Menu changes
4594
4595*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
4596keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
4597better supported.
4598
4599The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
4600a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
4601you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
4602can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
4603then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
4604
4605*** A new format for menu items is supported.
4606
4607In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
4608 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
4609defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
4610starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
4611
4612The format is:
4613 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
4614 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
4615where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
4616string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
4617The supported properties include
4618
4619:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4620 item is enabled.
4621:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4622 item should appear in the menu.
79214ddf 4623:filter FILTER-FN
a933dad1
DL
4624 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
4625 which will be REAL-BINDING.
4626 It should return a binding to use instead.
4627:keys DESCRIPTION
4628 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
4629 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
4630 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
4631:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
4632 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
4633 keyboard binding.
4634:key-sequence nil
4635 This means that the command normally has no
4636 keyboard equivalent.
4637:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
4638:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
4639 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
4640 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
4641 value says whether this button is currently selected.
4642
4643Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
4644Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
4645
4646(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
4647
4648** New event types
4649
4650*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
4651mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
4652corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
4653which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
4654
4655 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
4656
4657where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4658same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
4659indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
4660negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
4661the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
4662forward, away from the user.
4663
4664As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4665
4666*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
4667files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
4668and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
4669filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
4670loaded into Emacs. The format is:
4671
4672 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
4673
4674where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4675same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
4676that were dragged and dropped.
4677
4678As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4679
4680** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
4681
4682*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
4683any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
4684to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
4685
4686*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
4687can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
4688that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
4689
4690*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
4691in Emacs 19 and before.
4692
4693The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
4694The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
4695
4696*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
4697buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
4698unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
4699representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
4700
4701This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
4702as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
4703viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
4704one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
4705will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
4706
4707This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
4708representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
4709(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
4710consistent with the new representation.
4711
4712*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
4713representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
4714about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
4715however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4716
4717The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
4718nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
4719using the table nonascii-translation-table.
4720
4721*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
4722representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
4723representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4724
4725The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
4726loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
4727is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
4728
4729*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4730which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
4731
4732*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4733which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
4734
4735*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
4736portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
4737so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
4738You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
4739
4740*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
4741it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
4742
4743*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
4744convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
4745buffer or string being searched.
4746
4747One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
4748[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
4749searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
4750searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
4751obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
4752you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
4753expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
4754
4755*** Structure of coding system changed.
4756
4757All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
4758by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
4759which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
4760as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
4761vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
4762your own alias name of a coding system by the function
4763define-coding-system-alias.
4764
4765The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
4766the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
4767access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
4768pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
4769character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
4770safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
4771'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
4772`iso-8859-1'.
4773
4774Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
4775The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
4776coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
4777(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
4778
4779Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
4780also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
4781are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
4782the other character sets and read it back correctly.
4783
4784*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
4785proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
4786This function requires a user interaction.
4787
4788*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
4789find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
4790select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
4791systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
4792a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
4793select-safe-coding-system.
4794
4795*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
4796decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
4797last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
4798was done.
4799
4800*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
4801used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
4802coding systems used by some specific language environment.
4803
4804*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
4805return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
4806characters are found, they now return a list of single element
4807`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
4808
4809*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
4810coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
4811coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
4812converted.
4813
4814*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
4815coding system for communicating with other X clients.
4816
4817*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
4818character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
4819character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
4820each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
4821either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
4822range of characters.
4823
4824*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
4825Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
4826
4827*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
4828in the current buffer at position POS.
4829
4830*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
4831input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
4832function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
4833character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
4834event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
4835binding input-method-function to nil.
4836
4837The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
4838method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
4839input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
4840the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
4841not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
4842
4843The input method function is not called when reading the second and
4844subsequent events of a key sequence.
4845
4846*** You can customize any language environment by using
4847set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
4848
4849The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
4850customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
4851instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
4852environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
4853exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
4854\f
4855* Changes in Emacs 20.1
4856
4857** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
4858options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
4859at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
4860tree structure.
4861
4862M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
4863user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
4864
4865With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
4866session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
4867in your .emacs file.)
4868
4869** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
4870You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
4871
4872** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
4873This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
4874
4875** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
4876immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
4877kills the region.
4878
4879The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
4880delete the character before point, as usual.
4881
4882** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
4883on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
4884by setting search-highlight to nil.)
4885
4886** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
4887insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
4888the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
4889onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
4890history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
4891past.)
4892
4893** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
4894This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
4895in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
4896TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
4897makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
4898
4899As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
4900and is an alias for it.
4901
4902If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
4903use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
4904
4905** Scrolling changes
4906
4907*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
4908position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
4909
4910In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
4911on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
4912where it started.
4913
4914*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
4915move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
4916screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
4917does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
4918
4919*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
4920top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
4921comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
4922recenters the window.
4923
4924** International character set support (MULE)
4925
4926Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
4927including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
4928Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
4929Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
4930features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
4931MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
4932
4933Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
4934coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
4935character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
4936variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
4937into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
4938
4939Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
4940generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
4941supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
4942language, to make it possible to type them.
4943
4944The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
4945character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
4946
4947The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
4948to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
4949
4950You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
4951
4952 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
4953
4954Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
4955characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
4956argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
4957already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
4958characters for their work until they want to change.
4959
4960*** Input methods
4961
4962An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
4963specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
4964has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
4965the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
4966support several input methods.
4967
4968The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
4969another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
4970work.
4971
4972A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
4973characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
4974composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
4975consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
4976sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
4977letter.
4978
4979The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
4980by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
4981First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
4982marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
4983mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
4984
4985None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
4986they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
4987phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
4988converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
4989
4990Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
4991word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
4992typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
4993the first guess is wrong.
4994
4995*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
4996turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
4997
4998If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
4999byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5000they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5001the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5002
5003However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5004use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5005includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5006translate automatically to and from either one.
5007
5008*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5009
5010Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5011file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5012sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5013what you want.
5014
5015If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5016example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5017system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5018multibyte characters in that buffer.
5019
5020If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5021character conversion as well.
5022
5023*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5024
5025A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5026Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5027requires using many fonts.
5028
5029Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
5030collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
5031
5032A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
5033the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
5034have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
5035you would use a font.
5036
5037If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
5038specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
5039display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
5040
5041The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
5042(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
5043characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
5044or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5045and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5046
5047*** Defining fontsets.
5048
5049Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5050chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5051with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5052
5053Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5054of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5055`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5056standard fontset are created automatically.
5057
5058If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5059argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5060FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5061with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5062name is `fontset-startup'.
5063
5064Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5065The resource value should have this form:
5066 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5067FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5068 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5069 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5070 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5071The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5072of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5073CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5074FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5075
5076Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5077last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5078You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5079
5080For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5081font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5082following resource,
5083 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5084the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5085 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5086Here is the substitution rule:
5087 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5088 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5089 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5090 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5091 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5092
5093The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5094fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5095that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5096
5097With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
5098like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
5099name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
5100fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
5101fontsets.
5102
5103*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
5104defaults for a particular choice of language.
5105
5106Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
5107method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
5108visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
5109already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
5110language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
5111system for new files that you create.
5112
5113It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
5114set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
5115whole Emacs session.
5116
5117For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
5118chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
5119with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
5120
5121*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
5122specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
5123specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
5124the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
5125coding systems that Emacs supports.
5126
5127*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
5128lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
5129This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
5130After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
5131is used for *the immediately following command*.
5132
5133So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
5134write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
5135
5136If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
5137then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
5138
5139For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5140visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5141
5142*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5143construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5144to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5145specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5146of the file.
5147
5148*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5149the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5150code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5151translated into that character code.
5152
5153This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5154various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5155
5156By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5157
5158*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5159the coding system for keyboard input.
5160
5161Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5162with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5163some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5164
5165By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5166
5167Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5168input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5169translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5170to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5171designed to work with terminals.
5172
5173*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5174specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5175This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5176has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5177translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5178in the corresponding buffer.
5179
5180By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5181
5182*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5183to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5184It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5185
5186*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5187an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5188command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5189want to use.
5190
5191C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5192method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5193
5194*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5195layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5196remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5197which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5198
5199*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5200the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5201related information.
5202
5203*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5204HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5205scripts.
5206
5207*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5208information about the support for a particular language.
5209You specify the language as an argument.
5210
5211*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5212the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5213first dash.
5214
5215A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5216(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
5217whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
52181 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
5219
5220 A alternativnyj (Russian)
5221 B big5 (Chinese)
5222 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
5223 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
5224 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
5225 E euc-japan (Japanese)
5226 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5227 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
5228 K euc-korea (Korean)
5229 R koi8 (Russian)
5230 Q tibetan
5231 S shift_jis (Japanese)
5232 T lao
5233 T tis620 (Thai)
5234 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
5235 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5236 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
5237 v viqr (Vietnamese)
5238 z hz (Chinese)
5239
5240When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
5241two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
5242coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
5243keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
5244
5245*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
5246conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
5247
5248When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
5249into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
5250rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
5251Rmail files themselves.
5252
5253*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
5254conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
5255
5256Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
5257for sending mail:
5258
5259- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
5260- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
5261- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
5262 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
5263- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
5264
5265*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
5266to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
5267Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
5268translations.
5269
5270** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
5271of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
5272insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
5273without any conversion.
5274
5275** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
5276You can now specify any number of octal digits.
5277RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
5278any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
5279
5280** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
5281functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
5282
5283Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
5284Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
5285
5286Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
5287mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
5288
5289** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
5290complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
5291in the buffer before point.
5292
5293With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
5294symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
5295you are using.
5296
5297With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
5298just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
5299
5300** File locking works with NFS now.
5301
5302The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
5303in the same directory as FILENAME.
5304
5305This means that collision detection between two different machines now
5306works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
5307can become a bottleneck.
5308
5309The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
5310does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
5311create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
5312file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
5313rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
5314so useful that the change is worth while.
5315
5316When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
5317are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
5318collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
5319tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
5320
5321** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
5322it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
5323show-paren-mode.
5324
5325** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
5326selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
5327delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
5328
5329** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
5330within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
5331complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
5332
5333** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
5334it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
5335set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
5336
5337** Changes in View mode.
5338
5339*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
5340Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
5341
5342*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
5343view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
5344
5345*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
5346previous state.
5347
5348*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
5349scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
5350
5351*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
5352non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
5353not just the selected window.
5354
5355*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
5356read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
5357turns View mode on or off.
5358
5359*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
5360how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
5361delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
5362
5363** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
5364now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
5365
5366** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
5367has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
5368presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
5369which version to compare with.
5370
5371** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
79214ddf 5372blocks if a match is inside the block.
a933dad1
DL
5373
5374The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
5375is outside the block. By customizing the variable
5376isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
5377shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
5378
5379By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
5380of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
5381blocks, all of them or none.
5382
5383** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
5384current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
5385confirmation first.
5386
5387** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
5388now changes the major mode according to that file name.
5389However, the mode will not be changed if
5390(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
5391(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
5392 not suitable for ordinary files, or
5393(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
5394
5395This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
5396
5397However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
5398these commands do not change the major mode.
5399
5400** M-x occur changes.
5401
5402*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
5403it performs a case-sensitive search.
5404
5405*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
5406if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
5407using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
5408
5409** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
5410in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
5411window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
5412that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
5413buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
5414
5415** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
5416after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
5417appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
5418come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
5419
5420** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
5421selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
5422buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
5423
5424** Outline mode changes.
5425
5426*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
5427
5428*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
5429
5430** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
5431you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
5432Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
5433was already active.
5434
5435The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
5436unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
5437get confused by it.
5438
5439If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
5440set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
5441
5442** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
5443
5444*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
5445conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
5446character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
5447including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
5448
5449The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
5450mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
5451copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
5452
5453*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
5454are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
5455values.
5456
5457`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
5458case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
5459`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
5460case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
5461
5462** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
5463certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
5464can be. The default value is 30.
5465
5466** Changes in Mail mode.
5467
5468*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
5469Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
5470composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
5471`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
5472`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
5473behavior.
5474
5475C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
5476compose-mail-other-frame.
5477
5478*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
5479the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
5480replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
5481buffer that shows the original message.
5482
5483*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
5484with separator lines around the contents.
5485
5486*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
5487in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
5488definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
5489need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
5490
5491*** New features in the mail-complete command.
5492
5493**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
5494for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
5495controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
5496Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
5497
5498**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
5499to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
5500/etc/passwd.
5501
5502**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
5503to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
5504/etc/passwd.
5505
5506** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
5507special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
5508directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
5509reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
5510
5511Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
5512when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
5513be taken to be magic.
5514
5515** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
5516files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
5517available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
5518
5519M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
5520(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
5521
5522** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
5523suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
5524
5525In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
5526
5527new key dired.el binding old key
5528------- ---------------- -------
5529 * c dired-change-marks c
5530 * m dired-mark m
5531 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
5532 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
5533 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
5534 * u dired-unmark u
5535 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
5536 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
5537 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
5538 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
5539 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
5540 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
5541
5542** Rmail changes.
5543
5544*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
5545saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
5546chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
5547each time you run it.
5548
5549*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
5550whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
5551
5552*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
5553messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
5554means to move in the opposite direction.
5555
5556*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
5557you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
5558
5559*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
5560just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
5561It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
5562can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
5563for output.
5564
5565** Gnus changes.
5566
5567*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
5568
79214ddf
FP
5569*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
5570Gnus.
a933dad1 5571
79214ddf 5572*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
a933dad1
DL
5573`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
5574
5575*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
5576article mode line.
5577
5578*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
5579
5580*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
5581
5582(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
5583
5584*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
5585are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
5586`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
5587
5588*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
5589
5590*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
5591
5592*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
5593See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
5594
5595*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
5596Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
5597used to pick articles.
5598
5599*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
5600another have been added.
5601
5602 `M-x gnus-change-server'
5603
5604*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
5605generating lines in buffers.
5606
5607*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
5608`M-C-_'.
5609
5610*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
5611
5612*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
5613
5614 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
5615
5616*** Scores can be decayed.
79214ddf 5617
a933dad1
DL
5618 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
5619
5620*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
5621Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
5622
5623*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
5624the native server.
5625
5626 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
5627
5628*** A new command for reading collections of documents
5629(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
5630
5631*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
5632
5633*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
5634even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
5635
5636*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
5637(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
5638
5639 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
5640 a group.
5641
5642*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
5643sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
5644
5645 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
5646
5647*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
5648
5649 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
5650
5651*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
79214ddf 5652
a933dad1
DL
5653 Use the `Y c' command.
5654
5655*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
5656
5657*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
5658
5659 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
5660
5661*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
5662from incoming mail before saving the mail.
79214ddf 5663
a933dad1
DL
5664 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
5665
5666*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
5667
5668*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
5669the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
5670
5671 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
5672
5673Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
5674and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
5675from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
5676hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
5677this issue.)
5678
5679Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
5680automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
5681particular news group. This can be done by:
5682
5683 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
5684
5685Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
5686of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
5687"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
5688system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
5689for reading and posting).
5690
5691CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
5692 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
5693Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
5694newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
5695there.
5696
5697Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
5698default. Here are some of these default settings:
5699
5700 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
5701 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
5702 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
5703 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
5704 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
5705
5706When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
5707the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
5708
5709** CC mode changes.
5710
5711*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
5712code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
5713values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
5714this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
5715Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
5716loaded.
5717
5718If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
79214ddf 5719Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
a933dad1 5720style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
79214ddf
FP
5721share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
5722c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
a933dad1
DL
5723must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
5724
5725*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
5726of the current buffer.
5727
5728*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
5729it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
5730of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
5731
5732*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
5733style that the Python developers like.
5734
5735*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
5736This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
5737just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
5738
5739** VC Changes [new]
5740
5741** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
5742name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
5743directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
5744
5745This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
5746master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
5747developers.
5748
5749You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
5750RET in a buffer visiting that file.
5751
5752*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
5753other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
5754writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
5755calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
5756
5757*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
5758version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
5759
5760** Calendar changes.
5761
5762A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
5763of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
5764for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
5765
5766** ps-print changes
5767
79214ddf 5768There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
a933dad1
DL
5769
5770*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
5771
5772The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
5773formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
5774`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
5775`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
5776It defaults to `letter'.
5777If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
5778
5779The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
79214ddf 5780of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
a933dad1
DL
5781non-nil means "landscape" mode.
5782
5783The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
5784It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
79214ddf 5785It defaults to 1.
a933dad1
DL
5786
5787*** Horizontal layout
5788
5789The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
5790`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
5791All are measured in points.
5792
5793*** Vertical layout
5794
5795The vertical layout is determined by the variables
5796`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
5797All are measured in points.
5798
5799*** Headers
5800
5801If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
5802`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
5803margin above the text.
5804
79214ddf 5805If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
a933dad1
DL
5806framing box is printed around the header.
5807
5808The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
5809`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
5810
79214ddf
FP
5811The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
5812`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
a933dad1
DL
5813`ps-header-font-size'.
5814
5815*** Font managing
5816
5817The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
5818used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
5819`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
5820elements to this alist.
5821
79214ddf 5822The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
a933dad1
DL
5823for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
5824
5825** hideshow changes.
5826
5827*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
79214ddf 5828C++, ; for lisp).
a933dad1
DL
5829
5830*** Support for java-mode added.
5831
5832*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
5833in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
5834
5835*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
5836the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
5837way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
5838
5839*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
5840robust and a lot faster.
5841
79214ddf 5842*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
a933dad1
DL
5843
5844*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
5845to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
5846documentation for more details.
5847
5848** Changes in Enriched mode.
5849
5850*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
5851filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
5852of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
5853use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
5854the next time unless the fill-column is different.
5855
5856*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
5857distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
5858as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
5859as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
5860
5861** Font Lock mode
5862
5863*** Custom support
5864
5865The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
5866font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
5867faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
5868group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
5869your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
5870consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
5871
5872You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
5873
5874*** Maximum decoration
5875
5876Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
5877default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
5878of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
5879supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
5880to get the old behavior.
5881
5882*** New support
5883
5884Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
5885
5886Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
5887support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
5888
5889*** Configurable support
5890
5891Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
5892additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
5893c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
5894java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
5895list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
5896of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
5897convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
5898
5899Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
5900way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
5901it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
5902
5903*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
5904
5905You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
5906highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
5907for any mode.
5908
5909For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
5910
5911 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
5912
5913in your ~/.emacs.
5914
5915*** New faces
5916
5917Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
5918font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
5919distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
5920to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
5921
5922*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
5923
5924The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
5925cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
5926same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
5927
5928*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
5929
5930The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
5931according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
5932the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
5933non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
5934refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
5935the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
5936Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
5937
5938This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
5939For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
5940this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
5941refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
5942containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
5943the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
5944
5945As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
5946
5947Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
5948Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
5949Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
5950new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
5951
5952If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
5953settings.
5954
5955** Ada mode changes.
5956
5957*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
5958If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
5959procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
5960you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
5961stubs.
5962
5963*** There are two new commands:
5964 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
5965 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
5966
5967The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
5968`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
79214ddf 5969`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
a933dad1
DL
5970
5971*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
5972is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
5973Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
5974
5975*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
5976formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
5977places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
5978space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
5979
5980** Scheme mode changes.
5981
5982*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
5983mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
5984for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
5985with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
5986have any effect.
5987
5988If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
5989still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
5990scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
5991variables as buffer-local variables.
5992
5993*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
5994Use M-x dsssl-mode.
5995
133c9e59
GM
5996** Changes to the emacsclient program
5997
875c1439
GM
5998*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
5999USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6000associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6001can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6002
133c9e59 6003*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
a933dad1
DL
6004it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6005buffer in Emacs.
6006
133c9e59
GM
6007*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6008use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6009ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6010option takes precedence.
6011
a933dad1
DL
6012** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6013constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6014(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6015
6016** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6017which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6018the current defun.
6019
6020** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6021following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6022
6023** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6024and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6025necessary).
6026
6027** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6028if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
6029these register values no longer become completely useless.
6030If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
6031asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
6032it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
6033
6034** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
6035example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
6036be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
6037you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
6038
6039You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
6040variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
6041file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
6042revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
6043only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
6044
6045** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6046since it applies only to the current frame.
6047
6048** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6049file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6050and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6051
6052This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6053multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6054variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6055tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6056instead of just the file you are editing.
6057
6058** RefTeX mode
6059
6060RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6061and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6062different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6063multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6064turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6065
79214ddf 6066C-c ( reftex-label
a933dad1
DL
6067 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6068 knows which kind of label is needed.
6069
6070C-c ) reftex-reference
6071 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6072 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6073
6074C-c [ reftex-citation
6075 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6076 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6077
6078C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6079 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6080
6081C-c = reftex-toc
6082 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6083 can quickly jump to every section.
79214ddf 6084
a933dad1
DL
6085Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6086commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6087Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6088reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6089C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6090
6091** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6092
6093*** Info documentation is now available.
6094
6095*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6096both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
6097
6098*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
6099bibtex-user-optional-fields.
6100
6101*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
6102(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
6103
6104*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
6105entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
6106appropriate functions.
6107
6108*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
6109entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
6110
6111*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
6112been cleaned.
6113
6114*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
6115bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
6116
6117*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
6118shall be delimited.
6119
6120*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
6121bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
6122bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
6123
6124*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
6125field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
6126prefixed with `ALT'.
6127
6128*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
6129bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
6130formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
6131documentation).
6132
6133*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
6134documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
6135for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
6136
6137*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
6138comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6139
6140*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6141alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6142signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6143
6144*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6145
6146*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6147
6148*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6149from alien sources.
6150
6151*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6152to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6153crossref entries.
6154
6155*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6156region.
6157
6158*** Added support for imenu.
6159
6160*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6161of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6162`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6163`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6164
6165*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6166from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6167
6168** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6169
30a009a5 6170** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
047f434a 6171
a933dad1
DL
6172** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6173functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6174Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6175as an argument.
6176
6177When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6178and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6179
6180** browse-url changes
6181
6182*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6183Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6184(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6185non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6186customization variables.
6187
6188*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6189
6190*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6191lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6192(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6193
6194** Changes in Ediff
6195
6196*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6197pops up the Info file for this command.
6198
6199*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6200the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6201merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6202directories).
6203
6204*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6205and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6206files in the same directory.
6207
6208*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6209The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6210related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6211
6212** Changes in Viper
6213
6214*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
79214ddf 6215*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
a933dad1
DL
6216 instead of vip-.
6217*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
79214ddf 6218*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
a933dad1
DL
6219Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
6220*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
6221*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
6222*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
6223color when Viper is in insert state.
6224*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
6225Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
6226viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
6227
6228** Etags changes.
6229
6230*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
6231default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
6232Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
6233variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
6234not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
6235
6236*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
6237
6238*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
6239constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
6240
6241*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
6242recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
6243In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
6244
6245*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
6246C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
6247recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
6248methods and protocols.
6249
6250*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
6251.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
6252column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
6253paragraph name.
6254
6255*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
6256an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
6257at least M times and as many as N times.
6258
6259** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
6260in files has changed slightly.
6261
6262With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
6263time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
6264This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
6265with old time-stamp-format values.
6266
6267In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
6268(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
6269This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
6270reasons.
6271
6272In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
6273natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
6274fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
6275(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
6276time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
6277specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
6278
6279Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
6280case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
6281truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
6282
6283The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
6284being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
6285future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
6286recommended now will continue to work then.
6287
6288See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
6289details.
6290
6291** There are some additional major modes:
6292
6293dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
6294m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
6295meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
6296
6297** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
6298copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
6299into Emacs.
6300
6301** New Lisp packages include:
6302
6303*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
6304
6305*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
6306be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
6307
6308*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
6309
6310*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
6311in shell buffers.
6312
6313*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
6314See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
6315and `elint-defun'.
6316
6317*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
6318meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
6319ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
6320strings or comments.
6321
6322These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
6323abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
6324you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
6325insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
6326at these points.
6327
6328*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
6329can visit them by short forms of their names.
6330
6331*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
6332Emacs Lisp function at point.
6333
6334*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
6335
6336*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
6337switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
6338
6339*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
6340
6341*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
6342
6343*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
6344
6345*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
6346from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
6347
6348*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
6349You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
6350inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
6351original place after inserting the copy.
6352
6353*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
6354on the buffer.
6355
6356You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
6357velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
6358(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
6359
6360Enable mouse-drag with:
6361 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
6362-or-
6363 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
6364
6365*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
6366mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
6367
6368*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
6369It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
6370
6371*** ogonek
6372
6373The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
6374Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
6375platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
6376TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
6377ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
6378prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
6379instance) and vice versa.
6380
6381To use this package load it using
6382 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
6383Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
79214ddf 6384 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
a933dad1
DL
6385 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
6386The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
6387ways of customization in `.emacs'.
6388
6389*** Interface to ph.
6390
6391Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
6392
6393The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
6394services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
6395these servers.
6396
6397*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
6398
6399*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
6400You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
6401while the real cursor does not move.
6402
6403*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
6404for visiting your favorite web sites.
6405
6406*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
6407so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
6408
6409** movemail change
6410
6411Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
6412mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
6413supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
6414user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
6415
6416This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
6417\f
6418* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
6419
6420** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
6421
6422Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
6423end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
6424Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
6425file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
6426file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
6427
6428To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
6429C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
6430coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
6431specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
6432LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
6433save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
6434\f
6435* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
6436
6437** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
6438Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
6439vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
6440Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
6441
6442** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
6443to start with w32- instead of win32-.
6444
6445In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
6446don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
6447"win".
6448
6449** Basic Lisp changes
6450
6451*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
6452evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
6453
6454*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
6455be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
6456or by the user.
6457
6458The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
6459
6460*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
6461
6462(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
6463(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
6464
6465*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
6466usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
6467its argument.
6468
6469*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
6470
6471*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
6472
6473*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
6474
6475*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
6476error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
6477include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
6478`format' function.
6479
6480*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
6481or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
6482whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
6483
6484*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
6485either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
6486adding one of these suffixes.
6487
6488*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
6489which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
79214ddf 6490If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
a933dad1
DL
6491
6492We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
6493because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
6494
6495*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
6496
6497*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
6498You must load the `cl' library to define it.
6499
6500*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
6501conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
6502
6503 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
6504
6505BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
6506BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
6507
6508*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
6509choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
6510restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
6511works using `save-current-buffer'.
6512
6513*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
6514write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
6515of the last form.
6516
6517*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
6518which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
6519last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
6520as the last form.
6521
6522*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
6523characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
6524matches.
6525
6526For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
6527
6528*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
6529with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
6530Then it returns that string.
6531
6532For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
6533
6534(with-output-to-string
6535 (princ "The buffer is ")
6536 (princ (buffer-name)))
6537
6538returns "The buffer is foo".
6539
6540** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
6541is non-nil.
6542
6543These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
6544buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
6545characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
6546
6547*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
6548a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
6549
6550Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
6551character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
6552Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
6553position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
6554characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
6555 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
6556
6557ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
6558Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
6559non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
6560characters".
6561
6562The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
6563through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
6564"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
6565range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
6566leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
6567
6568*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
6569(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
6570multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
6571character, which may be more than one buffer position.
6572
6573This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
6574always one buffer position, need to be changed.
6575
6576However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
79214ddf 6577
a933dad1
DL
6578*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
6579because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
6580have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
6581the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
6582guaranteed.
6583
6584*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
6585between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
6586character).
6587
6588When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
6589
6590 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
6591 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
6592 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
6593 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
6594 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
6595
6596*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
6597
6598*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
6599`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
6600more than the number of characters.
6601
6602You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
6603it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
6604\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
6605is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
6606follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
6607newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
6608
6609*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
6610and returns a string containing those characters.
6611
6612*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
6613(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
6614counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
6615character, sref signals an error.
6616
6617*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
6618in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
6619string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6620
6621*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
6622in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
6623region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6624
6625*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
6626the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
6627to a vector of the characters in it.
6628
6629*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
6630of a string. You call it as follows:
6631
6632 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
6633
6634This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
6635STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
6636This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
6637Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
6638it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
6639
6640*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
6641if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6642
6643*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
6644if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6645
6646*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
6647to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
6648not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
6649which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
6650
6651(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
6652
6653This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
6654
6655The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
6656If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
6657are not included in the resulting value.
6658
6659The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
6660at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
6661WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
6662is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
6663
6664If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
6665place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
6666character extends across that column), then the padding character
6667PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
6668string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
6669column START-COLUMN.
6670
6671*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
6672the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
6673necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
6674difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
6675changed text, before the change.
6676
6677*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
6678sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
6679one character set for each script, not for each language.
6680
6681**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
6682
6683**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
6684
6685**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
6686set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
6687
6688**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
6689name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
6690which identify the character within that character set.
6691
6692**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
6693byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
6694opposite of split-char.
6695
6696**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
6697of all the characters between BEG and END.
6698
6699**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
6700of all the characters in a string.
6701
6702*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
6703and specifying coding systems.
6704
6705**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
6706system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
6707of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
6708(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
6709and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
6710as what to do about code conversion.)
6711
6712**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
6713name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
6714
6715**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6716for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6717except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
6718
6719Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6720which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
6721to match against a file name.
6722
6723VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6724a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6725decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6726to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6727systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6728specifies the coding system for encoding.
6729
6730If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6731or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6732
6733**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
6734the coding system to use for network sockets.
6735
6736Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6737which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
6738either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
6739service names.
6740
6741VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6742a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6743decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6744to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6745systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6746specifies the coding system for encoding.
6747
6748If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6749or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6750
6751**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6752for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6753except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
6754start the subprocess.
6755
6756**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
6757systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
6758when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
6759(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
6760to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
6761
6762**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
6763coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
6764subprocess.
6765
6766It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
6767but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
6768start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
6769connection permanently or until overridden.
6770
6771The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
6772file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
6773network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
6774coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
6775It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
6776system for one operation at a time.
6777
6778**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
6779files, subprocesses or network connections.
6780
6781**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
6782coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
6783The value is a cons cell,
6784 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
6785where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
6786the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
6787input to the subprocess.
6788
6789**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
6790change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
6791
6792** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
6793customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
6794you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
6795
6796You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
6797variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
6798information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
6799legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
6800customization.
6801
6802Thus, instead of writing
6803
6804 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
6805 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
6806
6807you would now write this:
6808
6809 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
6810 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
6811 :type 'boolean
6812 :group foo)
6813
6814The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
6815two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
6816describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
6817for a description of them.
6818
6819The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
6820should belong to. You define a new group like this:
6821
6822 (defgroup ispell nil
6823 "Spell checking using Ispell."
6824 :group 'processes)
6825
6826The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
6827group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
6828but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
6829to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
6830second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
6831
6832Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
6833package should have just one group; a more complex package should
6834have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
6835package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
6836first-level subgroups.
6837
6838** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
6839
6840This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
6841separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
6842
6843** easy-mmode
6844
6845The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
6846developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
6847only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
6848predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
6849`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
6850`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
6851
6852** Text property changes
6853
6854*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
6855text property.
6856
6857*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
6858previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
6859place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
6860functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
6861starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
6862
6863If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
6864LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
6865of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
6866position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
6867
6868*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
6869value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
6870is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
6871
6872** Changes in invisibility features
6873
6874*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
6875hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
6876is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
6877should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
6878would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
6879make the overlay visible.
6880
6881During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
6882invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
6883needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
6884which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
6885the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
6886t when it should hide it.
6887
6888*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
6889
6890Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
79214ddf
FP
6891invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
6892and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
a933dad1 6893Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
79214ddf 6894manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
a933dad1
DL
6895Here is an example of how to do this:
6896
6897 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
79214ddf 6898 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
a933dad1 6899 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
79214ddf 6900 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
a933dad1
DL
6901
6902 ...
6903 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
6904
6905 ...
6906 ;; When done with the overlays:
6907 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
6908 ;; Or respectively:
6909 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
6910
6911** Changes in syntax parsing.
6912
6913*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
6914`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
6915obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
6916`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
6917
6918If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
6919is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
6920used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
6921
6922When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
6923character in the buffer is calculated thus:
6924
6925 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
6926 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
6927
6928 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
6929 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
6930 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
6931
6932 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
6933 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
6934 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
6935 determine the syntax type of the character.
6936
6937 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
6938 of the current buffer.
6939
6940*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
6941value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
6942for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
6943
6944*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
6945and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
6946only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
6947character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
6948another character with the same code (unless quoted).
6949
6950These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
6951text property.
6952
6953*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
6954arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
6955of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
6956
6957*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
6958(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
6959element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
6960nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
6961string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
6962
6963*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
6964syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
6965`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
6966
6967** Changes in face features
6968
6969*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
6970if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
6971
6972*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
6973of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
6974
6975*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
6976set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
6977
6978*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
6979set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
6980
6981*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
6982by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
6983and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
6984the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
6985overlay property).
6986
6987This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
6988arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
6989
6990** Changes in file-handling functions
6991
6992*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
6993directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
6994they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
6995is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
6996
6997This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
6998begins with ~.
6999
7000*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7001it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7002
7003*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7004the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7005
7006*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7007as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7008
7009*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7010character code conversion as well as other things.
7011
7012Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7013(formerly it did not).
7014
7015*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7016environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7017
7018*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7019instead of constant strings.
7020
7021*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7022to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7023any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7024
7025substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7026in the same way as before.
7027
7028*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
7029The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
7030which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
7031
7032*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
7033error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
7034else, and returns nil.
7035
7036*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
7037directory cannot be listed.
7038
7039** Changes in minibuffer input
7040
7041*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
7042read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
7043additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
7044argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7045ways:
7046
7047 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7048 It is available through the history command M-n.
7049
7050*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7051read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7052argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7053minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7054enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7055
7056In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7057argument in this way.
7058
7059*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7060from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7061minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7062
7063** Echo area features
7064
7065*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7066echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7067minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7068after the echo area is cleared.
7069
7070*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7071in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7072
7073** Keyboard input features
7074
7075*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7076set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7077
7078*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7079received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7080by keyboard macros.
7081
7082** Frame-related changes
7083
7084*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7085creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7086hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7087
7088*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7089the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7090has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7091
7092*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7093selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7094value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7095in the selected frame.
7096
7097*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
7098is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
7099which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
7100
7101** X Windows features
7102
7103*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
7104x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
7105x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
7106
7107*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
7108The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
7109
7110*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
7111MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
7112A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
7113
7114If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
7115it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
7116
7117** Subprocess features
7118
7119*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
7120functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
7121automatically.
7122
7123*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
7124and returns the output from the command as a string.
7125
7126*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
7127and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
7128
7129** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
7130does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
7131
7132** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
7133at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
7134goes after the other menu items.
7135
7136** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
79214ddf 7137of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
a933dad1
DL
7138around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7139are in use.
7140
7141The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7142series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7143
7144Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7145after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7146form.
7147
7148** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7149is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7150but its hook is still run.
7151
7152** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7153for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7154
7155If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7156regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7157useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7158
7159This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7160are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7161filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7162warned.
7163
7164** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7165way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7166
7167** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7168integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7169functions like display-time.
7170
7171** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7172name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7173
7174** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7175can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7176is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7177
7178** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7179if there is an error in compilation.
7180
7181** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7182switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7183argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7184they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7185
7186** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7187Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7188the *scratch* buffer.
7189
7190** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7191The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7192where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7193e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7194
7195** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7196and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7197It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7198
7199** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7200using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7201variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7202and compose-mail-other-frame.
7203
7204** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7205can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7206full name of the specified user will be returned.
7207
7208** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7209of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7210where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7211in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7212option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7213files at all.
7214
7215** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7216and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
7217width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
7218the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
7219
7220For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
7221minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
7222with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
7223is how %S normally pads to two positions.
7224
7225** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
7226
7227** imenu.el changes.
7228
7229You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
79214ddf 7230item from menu created by imenu.
a933dad1
DL
7231
7232An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
7233#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
7234select one of those items.
7235\f
7236* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
7237\f
7238* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
7239
7240** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
7241mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
7242
7243** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
7244use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
7245Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
7246\f
7247* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
7248
7249** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
7250To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
7251
7252** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7253conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
7254matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
7255expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
7256word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
7257all caps.
7258
7259** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
7260at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
7261
7262When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
7263does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
7264as in previous Emacs versions.
7265
7266** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
7267non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
7268time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
7269frames.
7270
7271** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
7272if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
7273This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
7274Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
7275accident.
7276
7277** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
7278keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
7279It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
7280line and then executing the macro.
7281
7282This command is not new, but was never documented before.
7283
7284** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
7285(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
7286characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
7287characters.
7288
7289** Font Lock mode
7290
7291*** Font Lock support modes
7292
7293Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
7294below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
7295hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
7296to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
7297Font Lock mode is enabled.
7298
7299For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
7300
7301 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
7302
7303in your ~/.emacs.
7304
7305*** lazy-lock
7306
7307The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
7308only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
7309becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
7310Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
7311occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
7312buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
7313Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
7314
7315To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
7316
7317 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
7318
7319To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
7320
7321** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7322
7323*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
7324paren and key.
7325
7326*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
7327supported.
7328
7329** Gnus changes.
7330
7331Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
7332commands and variables have been added. There should be no
7333significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
7334previously released version, except in the message composition area.
7335
7336Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
7337between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
7338
79214ddf 7339*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
a933dad1
DL
7340variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
7341obsolete.
7342
7343*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
7344missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
7345
7346 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
7347
7348*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
7349
7350 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
7351
7352*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
79214ddf 7353referred.
a933dad1
DL
7354
7355*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
7356
7357 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
7358
7359*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
7360
7361 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
7362
7363*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
79214ddf 7364buffers.
a933dad1
DL
7365
7366 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
7367
7368*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
7369
7370 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
7371
7372*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
7373
7374 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
7375
7376*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
7377
7378 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
7379
7380*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
7381is possible.
7382
7383 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
7384
7385*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
7386groups of groups.
7387
7388*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
7389
7390*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
79214ddf 7391batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
a933dad1
DL
7392
7393*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
7394
7395*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
7396
7397*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
7398
7399 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
7400
7401*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
7402expiration times.
7403
7404*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
7405
7406*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
7407process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
7408
7409*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
7410articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
7411bound to keys on the `/' submap.
7412
7413*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
7414articles with the `*' command.
7415
7416*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
7417
7418*** Article headers can be buttonized.
7419
7420 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
7421
7422*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
7423
79214ddf 7424*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
a933dad1
DL
7425`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
7426
7427*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
79214ddf 7428buffer.
a933dad1
DL
7429
7430*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
7431
7432*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
7433
7434*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
7435
7436 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
7437
79214ddf 7438*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
a933dad1
DL
7439
7440 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
7441
79214ddf 7442*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
a933dad1
DL
7443
7444*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
7445
79214ddf 7446*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
a933dad1 7447
79214ddf 7448 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
a933dad1
DL
7449 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
7450
7451*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
79214ddf 7452refetching.
a933dad1
DL
7453
7454 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
7455
7456*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
7457buffer to allow easier treatment.
7458
7459*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
7460
7461*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
7462
7463 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
7464
7465*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
79214ddf 7466articles.
a933dad1
DL
7467
7468 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
7469
79214ddf 7470*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
a933dad1
DL
7471
7472*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
7473cited text to hide is now customizable.
7474
7475 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
7476
7477*** Boring headers can be hidden.
7478
7479 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
7480
7481*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
7482
7483*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
7484
7485The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
7486in greater detail.
7487\f
7488* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
7489
7490** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
7491second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
7492asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
7493exists.
7494
7495** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
7496as well as lists.
7497
7498** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
7499of a given keymap.
7500
7501** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
7502given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
7503keymap or nil.
7504
7505** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
7506an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
7507name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
7508menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
7509equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
7510alias.
7511\f
7512* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
7513
7514** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
7515
7516Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
7517This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
7518was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
7519far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
7520pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
7521
7522For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
7523you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
7524`http://www.vtw.org/'.
7525
7526** A note about C mode indentation customization.
7527
7528The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
7529do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
7530It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
7531much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
7532chapter of the manual for details.
7533
7534However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
7535customization variables take effect.
7536
7537** Marking with the mouse.
7538
7539When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
7540highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
7541using M-x transient-mark-mode.
7542
7543** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
7544
7545*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
7546
7547*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
7548to work on NT only and not on 95.)
7549
7550*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
7551in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
7552you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
7553application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
7554applications, these problems are significant.
7555
7556If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
7557likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
7558However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
7559will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
7560other DOS application as a subprocess.
7561
7562Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
7563You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
7564
7565If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
7566subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
7567have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
7568Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
7569separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
7570Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
7571
7572** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
7573
7574This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
7575which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
7576minibuffer contains.
7577
7578** `title' frame parameter and resource.
7579
7580The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
7581It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
7582It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
7583affects just the displayed title of the frame.
7584
7585The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
7586it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
7587and also serves as the default for the displayed title
7588when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
7589
7590** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
7591enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
7592
7593** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
7594F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
7595Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
7596
7597If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
7598menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
7599something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
7600the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
7601
7602 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
7603
7604** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
7605to replace the characters it "deletes".
7606
7607** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
7608
7609** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
7610a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
7611select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
7612It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
7613immediately after the selected one.
7614
7615This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
7616made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
7617
7618** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
7619
7620Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
7621directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
7622If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
7623Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
7624recover-session.
7625
7626You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
7627auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
7628will not work.
7629
7630Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
7631normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
7632this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
7633bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
7634now that the bug is fixed.
7635
7636** Changes to Version Control (VC)
7637
7638There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
7639when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
7640Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
7641which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
7642
7643If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
7644telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
7645VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
7646the link is visited and a warning displayed.
7647
7648** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
7649Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
7650is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
7651
7652There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
7653Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
7654enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
7655The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
7656remain normal.
7657
7658** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
7659header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
7660
7661Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
7662known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
7663offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
7664Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
7665
7666Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
7667of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
7668a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
7669name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
7670documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
7671`mail-directory-stream'.)
7672
7673** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
7674skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
7675characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
7676with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
7677
7678Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
7679- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
7680wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
7681
7682The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
7683less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
7684headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
7685Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
7686Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
7687fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
7688to a limitation in font-lock).
7689
7690External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
7691
7692** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
7693buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
7694buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
7695this example:
7696
7697 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
7698 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
7699
7700** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7701
7702*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
7703
7704*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
7705
7706*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
7707
7708*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
7709entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
7710will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
7711isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
7712(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
7713The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
7714
7715*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
7716does the same job.
7717
7718*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
7719"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
7720
7721*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
7722text.
7723
7724** Font Lock mode
7725
7726*** Global Font Lock mode
7727
7728Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
7729new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
7730font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
7731turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
7732on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
7733
7734For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
7735
7736 (global-font-lock-mode t)
7737
7738in your ~/.emacs.
7739
7740*** Local Refontification
7741
7742In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
7743However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
7744those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
7745command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
7746
7747In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
7748(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
7749current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
7750above and below point.
7751
7752With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
7753
7754** Follow mode
7755
7756Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
7757buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
7758side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
7759they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
7760split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
7761follow-mode.
7762
7763M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
7764
7765To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
7766command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
7767
7768** hide-show changes.
7769
7770The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
7771to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
7772normal hooks.
7773
7774** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
7775The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
7776
7777** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
7778recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
7779those that begin a function, record, or macro.
7780
7781** MSDOS Changes
7782
7783*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
7784Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
7785
7786*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
7787and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
7788
7789*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
7790
7791*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
7792pressing both mouse buttons.
7793
7794*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
7795restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
79214ddf 7796are:
a933dad1
DL
7797
7798**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
7799now works.
7800
7801**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
7802
7803**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
7804implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
7805
7806**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
7807
7808**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
7809
7810**** `M-x recover-session' works.
7811
7812**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
7813
7814**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
7815\f
7816* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
7817
7818** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
7819tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
7820remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
7821this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
7822behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
7823
7824** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
7825
7826The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
7827not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
7828need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
7829be different.
7830
7831It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
7832than `system-type'.
7833
7834See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
7835
7836** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
7837now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
7838
7839** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
7840that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
7841
7842** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
7843no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
7844reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
7845
7846The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
7847to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
7848like this:
7849
7850 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
7851
7852SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
7853It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
7854becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
7855
7856REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
7857seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
7858means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
7859
7860*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
7861up if too much time passes.
7862
7863 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
7864
7865This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
7866If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
7867of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
7868form in BODY.
7869
7870*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
7871a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
7872call looks like this:
7873
7874 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
7875
7876SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
7877runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
7878timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
7879ARGS.
7880
7881Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
7882command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
7883command.
7884
7885REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
7886time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
7887does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
7888each time Emacs becomes idle.
7889
7890If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
7891idle for SECS seconds.
7892
7893*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
7894all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
7895programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
7896instead.
7897
7898*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
7899there is no answer within a certain time.
7900
7901 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
7902
7903asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
7904within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
7905Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
7906
7907** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
7908arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
7909meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
7910arguments in between are ignored.
7911
7912This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
7913the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
7914
7915** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
7916/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
7917/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
7918site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
7919version.
7920
7921It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
7922version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
7923for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
7924has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
7925and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
7926problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
7927
7928** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
7929.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
7930systems with limited file name syntax.
7931
7932Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
7933convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
7934for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
7935completions.el:
7936
7937(defvar save-completions-file-name
7938 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
7939 "*The filename to save completions to.")
7940
7941This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
7942depends on the operating system, because the definition of
7943convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
7944Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
7945MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
7946
7947** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
7948rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
7949minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
7950
7951** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
7952marker from its buffer position.
7953
7954** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
7955Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
7956The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
7957
7958** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
7959that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
7960condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
7961of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
7962matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
7963regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
7964
7965This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
7966errors that happen often during editing.
7967
7968** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
7969into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
7970puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
7971
7972** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
7973now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
7974
7975** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
7976a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
7977name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
7978to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
7979and not get-buffer-window.
7980
7981** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
7982calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
7983being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
7984
7985If you use this feature, you should set the variable
7986buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
7987property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
7988non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
7989are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
7990property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
7991over and over for the same text.
7992
7993** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
7994
7995*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
7996in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
7997
7998;; @(#) HEADER: text
7999;; $HEADER: text $
8000
8001in addition to the normal
8002
8003;; HEADER: text
8004
8005*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8006checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8007lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8008\f
8009* For older news, see the file ONEWS.
8010
8011----------------------------------------------------------------------
8012Copyright information:
8013
404fa7d6 8014Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8015
8016 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8017 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8018 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8019 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8020
8021 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8022 of this document, or of portions of it,
8023 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8024 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8025\f
8026Local variables:
8027mode: outline
8028paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8029end: